Volvo S80 2011 Owners Manual PDF
en
Summary of Content for Volvo S80 2011 Owners Manual PDF
VOLVO S80
Owners Manual Web Edition
DEAR VOLVO OWNER THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and mainte- nance information contained in this owner's manual.
Table of contents
4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
00 00 Introduction
Important information................................. 8 Volvo and the environment....................... 11
01 01 Safety
Seatbelts .................................................. 16 Airbags...................................................... 19 Activating/deactivating the airbag*........... 22 Side airbags (SIPS bags) ......................... 24 Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................... 26 WHIPS ...................................................... 27 When the systems deploy ........................ 29 Safety mode.............................................. 30 Child safety............................................... 31 02
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade.................. 40 Privacy locking*......................................... 45 Battery replacement, remote control key/ PCC*......................................................... 46 Keyless drive*............................................ 48 Locking/unlocking..................................... 51 Child safety locks...................................... 55 Alarm*....................................................... 56
Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5
03 03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls.......................... 60 Instruments and controls - Executive ...... 68 Key positions............................................ 69 Seats......................................................... 71 Seats - Executive...................................... 75 Steering wheel.......................................... 77 Lighting..................................................... 78 Wipers and washing.................................. 87 Windows, rearview and door mirrors........ 89 Compass*................................................. 94 Power sunroof*......................................... 95 Alcoguard*................................................ 97 Starting the engine.................................. 101 Starting the engine Flexifuel................. 103 Starting the engine external battery..... 105 Gearboxes............................................... 106 All-wheel drive AWD*........................... 111 Foot brake............................................... 112 Parking brake.......................................... 114
HomeLink *............................................ 117
04 04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages............................. 122 Climate control........................................ 129 Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas- senger compartment heater*.................. 137 Additional heater*.................................... 140 Audio system.......................................... 141 RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen* .......................................... 154 Trip computer......................................... 159 DSTC Stability and traction control sys- tem.......................................................... 161 Adapting driving characteristics............. 163 Cruise control*........................................ 164 Adaptive cruise control*.......................... 166 Distance Alert*........................................ 174 Collision Warning with Auto Brake*........ 177 Driver Alert System DAC*..................... 183 Driver Alert System - LDW*..................... 186 Park assist syst*...................................... 189 BLIS* Blind Spot Information System. . 192 Comfort inside the passenger compart- ment........................................................ 196 Comfort inside the passenger compart- ment - Executive..................................... 199 Bluetooth handsfree*.............................. 200
04 Built-in phone*........................................ 205
Table of contents
6 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 05 During your journey
Recommendations during driving........... 212 Refuelling................................................ 215 Fuel......................................................... 216 Loading................................................... 220 Cargo area ............................................. 222 Driving with a trailer................................ 223 Towing and recovery.............................. 229
06 06 Wheels and tyres
General ................................................... 234 Changing wheels ................................... 238 Tyre pressure ......................................... 240 Warning triangle and first-aid kit*............ 241 Emergency puncture repair (TMK)* ........ 242
07 07 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment............................... 248 Lamps..................................................... 255 Wiper blades and washer fluid................ 262 Battery..................................................... 264 Fuses...................................................... 267 Car care.................................................. 275
Table of contents
7
08 08 Specifications
Type designations................................... 282 Dimensions and weights......................... 284 Engine specifications.............................. 288 Engine oil................................................ 289 Fluids and lubricants............................... 291 Fuel......................................................... 293 Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pres- sure ........................................................ 296 Electrical system..................................... 300 Type approval......................................... 301 Symbols in the display............................ 302 09
09 Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index.................................. 306
Introduction
Important information
8 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Reading the Owner's Manual
Introduction
A good way of getting to know your new car is to read the owner's manual, ideally before your first journey. This will give you the opportunity to familiarise yourself with new functions, to see how best to handle the car in different sit- uations, and to make the best use of all the car's features. Please pay attention to the safety instructions contained in the manual.
The specifications, design features and illus- trations in this owner's manual are not binding. We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice. Volvo Car Corporation
Option
All types of option/accessory are marked with an asterisk*.
In addition to standard equipment, this manual also describes options (factory fitted equip- ment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra equipment).
The equipment described in the owner's man- ual is not available in all cars - they have dif- ferent equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations.
In the event of uncertainty over what is stand- ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts advise of a risk of personal injury.
IMPORTANT
Important texts advise of a risk of material damage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of features and functions for exam- ple.
Footnote
There is footnote information in the owner's manual that is located at the bottom of the page. This information is an addition to the text that it refers to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a table then letters are used instead of numbers for referral.
Message texts
There are displays in the car that show text messages. These text messages are high-
lighted in the owner's manual by means of the text being slightly larger and printed in grey. Examples of this are in menu texts and mes- sage texts on the information display (e.g. Audio settings).
Decals
The car contains different types of decal which are designed to convey important information in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the car have the following descending degree of importance for the warning/information.
Warning for personal injury
G031590
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white text/image on black message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the
Introduction
Important information
9
warning is ignored, may result in serious per- sonal injury or fatality.
Risk of property damage
G 03 15 92
White ISO symbols and white text/image on black or blue warning field and message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in damage to property.
Information
G 03 15 93
White ISO symbols and white text/image on black message field.
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual are not provided as exact reproductions of those in the car. The purpose is to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your car in particular is available on the label in question in your car.
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a certain sequence are numbered in the owner's manual.
When there is a series of illustrations for step-by-step instructions each step is numbered in the same way as the corres- ponding illustration.
There are numbered lists with letters adja- cent to the series of illustrations where the order of the instructions is not significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnum- bered and are used to illustrate a move- ment.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-by- step instructions then the different steps are numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used in overview images where different com- ponents are pointed out. The number recurs in the position list featured in con- nection with the illustration that describes the item.
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of points in the owner's manual.
Example:
Introduction
Important information
10
Coolant
Engine oil
To be continued
This symbol is located furthest down to the right when a section continues on the following page.
Recording data
The driving and safety systems in the car use computers which check and share information with each other on the car's function. One or more of these computers may store informa- tion on the systems they check during normal driving, during the course of a collision or near- collision. Stored information may be used by:
Volvo Car Corporation
Service or repair workshops
Police or other authorities
Other parties who claim legal entitlement for access to the information or someone who has permission from the owner to access the information.
Accessories and extra equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of accessories can negatively affect the car's electrical system. Certain accessories only function when their associated software is installed in the car's computer system. Volvo therefore recommends that you always con- tact an authorised Volvo workshop before installing accessories which are connected to or affect the electrical system.
Information on the Internet
At www.volvocars.com there is further infor- mation concerning your car.
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 11
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy
G 00 00 00
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo- ration's core values which influence all opera- tions. We also believe that our customers share our consideration for the environment.
Your Volvo complies with strict international environmental standards and is also manufac- tured in one of the cleanest and most resource- efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo- ration has global ISO certification, which includes the environmental standard ISO 14001 covering all factories and several of our other units. We also set requirements for our partners so that they work systematically with environmental issues.
fuel consumption
Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower emis- sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con- sumption. For more information read under the heading, Reducing environmental impact.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the con- cept "Clean inside and out" a concept that encompasses a clean interior environment as well as highly efficient emission control. In
many cases the exhaust emissions are well below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger compartment
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust and pollen from entering the passenger com- partment via the air intake.
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte- rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom- ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic out- side.
The system consists of an electronic sensor and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni- tored continuously and if there is an increase in
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
12 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
the level of certain unhealthy gases such as carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed. Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, queues and tunnels for example.
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon filter.
Textile standard
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea- sant and comfortable, even for people with contact allergies and for asthma sufferers. Extreme attention has been given to choosing environmentally-compatible materials. This means that they also fulfil the requirements in the Oeko-Tex 100 standard1, a major advance towards a healthier passenger compartment environment.
Oeko-Tex certification covers seatbelts, car- pets and fabrics for example. The leather in the upholstery undergoes chromium-free tanning and fulfils the certification requirements.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car. In this way you contribute to a cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops are entrusted with the service and mainte- nance of your car it becomes part of our sys-
tem. Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in which our workshops are designed in order to prevent spills and discharges into the environment. Our workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools required to guarantee good environmental care.
Reducing environmental impact
You can easily help reduce environmental impact - here are a few tips:
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods. Pay attention to local regulations.
Drive economically - think ahead.
Perform service and maintenance in accordance with the owner's manual's instructions - follow the Service and War- ranty Booklet's recommended intervals.
If the car is equipped with an engine block heater*, use it before starting from cold - it improves starting capacity and reduces wear in cold weather and the engine rea- ches normal operating temperature more quickly, which lowers consumption and reduces emissions.
High speed increases consumption con- siderably due to increased wind resistance - a doubling of speed increases wind resis- tance 4 times.
Always dispose of environmentally hazar- dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in an environmentally safe manner. Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty about how this type of waste should be discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.
Following this advice can save money, the planet's resources are saved and the car's durability is extended. For more information and further advice, see the pages 212 and 294.
Recycling
As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is important that the car is recycled in an envi- ronmentally sound manner. Almost all of the car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is therefore requested to contact a dealer for referral to a certified/approved recycling facility.
The owner's manual and the environment
The FSC symbol shows that the paper pulp in this publication comes from FSC certified for- ests or other controlled sources.
1 More information on www.oekotex.com
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
13
14 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Seatbelts ................................................................................................ 16 Airbags.................................................................................................... 19 Activating/deactivating the airbag*......................................................... 22 Side airbags (SIPS bags) ....................................................................... 24 Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................................................................. 26 WHIPS .................................................................................................... 27 When the systems deploy ...................................................................... 29 Safety mode............................................................................................ 30 Child safety............................................................................................. 31
SAFETY
01 Safety
Seatbelts 01
16
General information
Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all passengers use their seatbelts.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can provide maximum protection. Do not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position.
Putting on a seatbelt
Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by press- ing its locking tab into the seatbelt buckle. A loud "click" indicates that the belt has locked.
The buckles only fit the intended lock in the rear seat1.
Releasing the seatbelt
Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does not hang loose.
The seatbelt locks and cannot be with-
drawn:
if it is pulled out too quickly
during braking and acceleration
if the car leans heavily.
Make sure that you:
do not use clips or anything else that can prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly
ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or caught on anything
the hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen)
tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one per- son.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts your- self. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the protective characteristics of the seat- belt may have been lost, even if it appears to be undamaged. In addition, replace the seatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and intended for installation in the same position as the replaced seatbelt.
1 Certain markets.
01 Safety
Seatbelts 01
17
Seatbelts and pregnancy
G 02
09 98
The seatbelt should always be worn during pregnancy. But it is then crucial that it be worn in the correct way. The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible. In addition, check that there are no twists in the seatbelt.
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers should adjust their seats and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals
and steering wheel). The aim should be to posi- tion the seat with as large a distance as possi- ble between abdomen and steering wheel.
Seatbelt reminder
G 01
77 26
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual reminder. The audio reminder is speed dependent, and in some cases time depend- ent. The visual reminder is located in the roof console and the combined instrument panel.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt reminder system.
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two subfunctions:
Provides information on which seatbelts are being used in the rear seat. A message appears in the information display when the seatbelts are in use, or if one of the rear doors has been opened. The message is cleared automatically after driving for approximately 30 seconds or after press- ing the indicator stalk's READ button.
Provides a warning if one of the rear seat- belts is unfastened during travel. This warning takes the form of a message on the information display along with the audio/visual signal. The warning stops when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can also be acknowledged manually by press- ing the READ button.
The message on the information display show- ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail- able. Press the READ button to see stored messages.
01 Safety
Seatbelts 01
18
Certain markets
An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind the driver and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one. At low speed, the audio reminder will sound for the first 6 seconds.
Seatbelt tensioner
All the seatbelts are equipped with belt ten- sioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a suffi- ciently violent collision. The seatbelt then pro- vides more effective restraint for the occu- pants.
WARNING
Never insert the tongue of the passenger's seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side. Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side. Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not func- tion as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury.
01 Safety
Airbags 01
19
Warning symbol on the combined instrument panel
The warning symbol in the combined instru- ment panel illuminates when the remote con- trol key is in key position II or III. The symbol clears after approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag system is fault-free.
WARNING
If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates while driv- ing, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The symbol indi- cates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys- tem, SIPS, the IC system or some other fault in the system. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.
As well as the warning symbol, a message may appear on the information display in appropri- ate cases. If the warning symbol malfunctions, the warning triangle illuminates and SRS
Airbag Service required or SRS Airbag
Service urgent appears in the display. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.
Airbag system
G 01
86 65
Airbag system, left-hand drive car.
G 01
86 66
Airbag system, right-hand drive car.
The system consists of airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot gas. To cushion the impact, the airbag deflates when compressed. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely nor- mal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious per- sonal injury.
01 Safety
Airbags 01
20
NOTE
The sensors react differently depending on the course of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts on the driver and passen- ger side are used.
It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli- sion. The airbag system senses the force of the collision on the car and adapts accord- ingly so that one or more airbags are deployed.
The capacity of the airbags is also adapted to the collision force to which the vehicle is subjected.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a left- hand drive car.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a right- hand drive car.
Airbag on the driver's side
The car has an airbag to supplement the pro- tection afforded by the seatbelt on the driver's side. It is folded up into the centre of the steer- ing wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.
Passenger airbag
The car has an airbag to supplement the pro- tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen- ger side. It is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG.
WARNING
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must be secured.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located.
01 Safety
Airbags 01
21
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated.
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01
22 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Key switch off - PACOS*
General information
The airbag for the front passenger seat can be deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For information on how to activate/deactivate, see under the heading Activating/deactivating.
Key switch off/switch
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS) is located on the passenger end of the instru- ment panel and is accessible when the pas- senger door is open (see under the heading below, Activating/deactivating).
Check that the switch is in the required posi- tion. Volvo recommends that the remote con- trol key's key blade be used to change posi- tion.
For information on the key blade, see page 43.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above could endanger the life of passengers in the car.
WARNING
If the car is equipped with a front passenger airbag, but does not have a PACOS switch (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch), then the airbag will always be activated.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated and the symbol in the roof console is illuminated. Failure to follow this advice could endanger the life of the child.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- senger seat if the message in the roof panel (see page 23) indicates that the airbag is deactivated and if the warning symbol for the airbag system is also displayed in the combined instrument panel. This indicates that there has been a severe malfunction. Visit a workshop as soon as possible. Volvo recommends that you contact an author- ised Volvo workshop.
Activating/deactivating
Switch location
The airbag is activated. With the switch in this position, persons taller than 140 cm can sit in the front passenger seat, but never children in a child seat or on a booster cushion.
The airbag is deactivated. With the switch in this position, children in a child seat or on a booster cushion can sit in the front passenger seat, but never persons taller than 140 cm.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 23
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated. This applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above could endanger life.
Messages
2
2
G 01
77 24
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is deactivated.
A text message and a symbol in the roof panel indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).
G 01
78 00
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is activated.
A warning symbol in the roof panel indicates that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated (see preceding illustration).
NOTE
When the remote control key is turned to key position II or III the warning symbol for the airbag is displayed on the combined instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds (see page 19).
Following which, the indicator in the roof console is illuminated showing the correct status for the front passenger seat airbag. For more information about the different key positions for the remote control key, see page 69.
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01
24
Side airbag
G 03
29 49
In a side impact collision a large proportion of the collision force is transferred by the SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil- lars, the floor, the roof and other structural parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv- er's and front passenger seats protect the chest area and the hip and are an important part of the SIPS.
The SIPS bag system consists of two main components, side airbag and sensors. The side airbags are located in the front seat backr- ests.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that repairs are only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Defective work in the SIPS- bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag.
Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.
The side airbag is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Child seats and side airbags
The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag.
A child seat or booster cushion can be placed on the front passenger seat provided that the car does not have an activated1 passenger air- bag.
Location
G 02
43 77
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
G 02
43 78
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips
1 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag, see page 22.
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01
25
the sensors and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision.
01 Safety
Inflatable Curtain (IC) 01
26
Properties
The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is a part of SIPS and the airbags. It is fitted in the headlining along both sides of the roof and protects the car's occupants sitting in the outer seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated. The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the driver and passengers from striking their heads on the inside of the car during a collision.
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hook is only designed for light clothing (not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended pro- tection. Volvo recommends that you only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas.
WARNING
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under the top edge of the door windows. Other- wise, the intended protection of the inflat- able curtain, which is concealed in the head- lining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
01 Safety
WHIPS 01
27
Protection against whiplash injury WHIPS
The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con- sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe- cially designed head restraints in the front seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end collision, where the angle and speed of the col- lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence.
WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Properties of the seat
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front seat backrests are lowered backward to alter the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WHIPS system and child seats/booster
cushions
The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the WHIPS system.
Correct seating position
For the best possible protection, the driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head restraint.
Do not obstruct the WHIPS system
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat back- rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS system.
01 Safety
WHIPS 01
28
Do not place objects on the rear seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not touch the folded backrest.
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo recommends that it is checked by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protective capacity may have been lost even if the seats appear to be undamaged.
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys- tem checked even after a minor rear-end collision.
01 Safety
When the systems deploy 01
29
When the systems deploy
System Triggered
Seatbelt tensioner, front seat
In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident and/or rear-end collision
Seatbelt tensioner, rear seat
In a frontal collision
Airbags (SRS) In a frontal collisionA
Side airbags (SIPS) In a side-impact accidentA
Inflatable Curtain IC In a side-impact accidentA
Whiplash protection WHIPS
In a rear-end colli- sion
A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a col- lision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.
If the airbags have deployed, the following is recommended:
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised
Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.
Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of components in the car's safety systems.
Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The SRS, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner sys- tems are deployed only once during a colli- sion.
WARNING
The airbag control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid, discon- nect the battery cables. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/ injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns.
01 Safety
Safety mode 01
30
Driving after a collision
G 02
10 62
If the car is involved in a collision, the text Safety mode See manual may appear on the information display. This means that the car has reduced functionality. Safety mode is a protective state that is enforced when the col- lision may have damaged any of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety systems, or the brake system.
Attempting to start the car
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car. There must be no smell of fuel either.
If everything seems normal and you have checked for indications of fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the car.
Remove the remote control key and open the driver's door. If a message is now shown to the
effect that the ignition is on, press the start button. Then close the door and reinsert the remote control key. The car's electronics will now try to reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to start the car.
If the message Safety mode See manual is still shown on the display then the car must not be driven or towed, but a vehicle recovery serv- ice used instead. Even if the car appears to be driveable, hidden damage may make the car impossible to control once moving.
Moving the car
If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode
See manual has been reset, the car can be moved carefully out of a dangerous position. Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in safety mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety mode See manual has been displayed.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode message is displayed. Leave the car at once.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its loca- tion. Volvo recommends that it is transpor- ted to an authorised Volvo workshop.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
31
Children should sit comfortably and safely
Volvo recommends that children travel in rear- facing child seats until as late an age as pos- sible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then front-facing booster cushions/child seats until up to 10 years of age.
The position of a child in the car and the choice of equipment are dictated by the child's weight and size, for more information, see page 33.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to coun- try. Check what does apply.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats, booster cushions & attachment devices) which is designed for your particular car. Using Vol- vo's child safety equipment provides you with optimum conditions for your child to travel safely in the car. Furthermore, the child safety equipment fits and is easy to use.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.
Child seats
G 02
07 39
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
NOTE
When using child safety products it is important to read the installation instruc- tions included.
Do not attach the straps for the child seat to the horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails or
beams under the seat. Sharp edges can dam- age the straps.
Look in the installation instructions for the child seat for the correct fitting.
Location of child seats
You may place:
a child seat/booster cushion on the pas- senger seat, provided the passenger air- bag is not activated1.
one or more child seats/booster cushions in the rear seat.
Always fit child seats/booster cushions in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. If a child is sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys.
1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
32
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen.
Label Airbag
Label fitted on the end face of the instrument panel on the passenger side, see the illustration on page 22.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
33
Recommended child seats2
Weight Front seat (with deactivated air- bag)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system.
Type approval: E5 04301146.
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system.
Type approval: E5 04301146.
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 03301146
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a pro- tective cushion between the child seat and the dashboard.
Type approval: E5 03135.
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 03135.
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 03135.
Child seats which are universally approved.
Child seats which are universally approved.
Child seats which are universally approved.
2 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
34
Weight Front seat (with deactivated air- bag)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 1
9-18 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192.
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a pro- tective cushion between the child seat and the dashboard.
Type approval: E5 03135.
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a pro- tective cushion between the child seat and the dashboard.
Type approval: E5 03135.
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a pro- tective cushion between the child seat and the dashboard.
Type approval: E5 03135.
Britax Fixway rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system and straps.
Type approval: E5 03171
Britax Fixway rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system and straps.
Type approval: E5 03171
Child seats which are universally approved.
Child seats which are universally approved.
Child seats which are universally approved.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
35
Weight Front seat (with deactivated air- bag)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 2
15-25 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps
Type approval: E5 04192
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps
Type approval: E5 04192
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps
Type approval: E5 04192
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139
Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139
Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139
01 Safety
Child safety 01
36
Child safety locks, rear doors
The controls for operating the rear door power windows and the rear door opening handles can be blocked from opening from the inside. For more information, see page 55.
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system are concealed behind the lower section of the rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indicated by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see pre- ceding illustration).
Press the seat cushion down to access the mounting points.
NOTE
The ISOFIX fixture system is an accessory for the passenger seat.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the ISOFIX mounting points.
Upper mounting points for child seats
The car is equipped with upper mounting points for child seats. These mounting points are located on the parcel shelf and are con- cealed by plastic covers. Bend aside the plas- tic covers to access each respective mounting point.
For cars with folding head restraints on the outside seats the head restraints should be folded to facilitate installation.
The upper mounting points are primarily intended for use with front-facing child seats. Volvo recommends that small children should sit in rear-facing child seats for as long as pos- sible.
For detailed information on how the child seat should be tensioned in the upper mounting points, see the seat manufacturer's instruc- tions.
WARNING
The child seat's straps must always be routed under the rear head restraints before being tensioned at the mounting point.
01 Safety
01
37
38 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Remote control key/key blade................................................................ 40 Privacy locking*....................................................................................... 45 Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*...................................... 46 Keyless drive*.......................................................................................... 48 Locking/unlocking................................................................................... 51 Child safety locks.................................................................................... 55 Alarm*...................................................................................................... 56
LOCKS AND ALARM
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
40
General
The car is supplied with 2 remote control keys or PCCs (Personal Car Communicator). They are used to start the car and for locking and unlocking.
More remote control keys can be ordered up to 6 can be programmed and used for the same car.
The PCC has increased functionality com- pared with the remote control key. The contin- uation of this chapter describes the functions available in both the PCC and the remote con- trol key.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Always remember to switch off the power supply to power windows and sunroof by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.
Loss of a remote control key
If you lose a remote control key then new ones can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The remain- ing remote control keys must then be taken to the workshop. The code of the missing remote
control key must be erased from the system as a theft prevention measure.
The current number of keys registered to the car can be checked under Car settings Car
Key memory Number of keys. For a description of the menu system, see page 122.
Key memory1 door mirrors and driver's
seat
The settings are automatically connected to each respective remote control key, see pages 72 and 91 .
The function can be activated/deactivated under Car settings Car Key memory
Seat & mirror positions.
For a description of the menu system, see page 122.
For cars with Keyless drive system, see page 48.
Indicator for locking/unlocking
When the car is locked or unlocked using the remote control key, the direction indicators confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly performed.
Locking - one flash
Unlocking - two flashes.
After locking the indication is only given if all locks have been activated once the doors have been closed.
Selecting the function
The function can be activated/deactivated under Car settings Light settings Lock
confirmation light and Car settings Light
settings Unlock confirmation light.
For a description of the menu system, see page 122.
Immobiliser
Each remote control key has a unique code. The car can only be driven with the correct remote control key with the correct code.
The following error messages in the combined instrument panel's information display are rela- ted to the electronic immobiliser:
1 Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 41
Message Specification
Key error Try again Error reading the remote control key during starting - Remove the key, re- insert it and try to start again.
Car key not found
(Only applies to Key- less drive with PCC.)
Error reading the PCC during starting - Try to start again.
If the error persists: Press the remote control key into the ignition switch and try to start again.
Immobiliser Try
start again
Error in immobiliser system during star- ting. If the fault per- sists the recommen- dation is to contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
For starting the car, see page 101.
Functions
G 02
10 78
Remote control key.
Locking
Unlocking
Approach light duration
Boot lid
Panic function
G 02
10 79
PCC* - Personal Car Communicator.
Information
Function buttons
Locking Locks the doors and boot lid while the alarm is activated.
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to close all the windows and sunroof* simultaneously.
WARNING
If the sunroof and windows are closed using the remote control key, check that no one is in danger of getting hands caught.
Unlocking Unlocks the doors and boot lid while the alarm is deactivated.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
42 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to open all windows simultaneously.
The function can be changed from unlocking all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the driv- er's door only with one press of the button and, after a further press of the button - within 10 seconds - unlocking the remaining doors.
The function can be changed in the menu sys- tem under Car settings Lock settings
Doors unlock with both the alternatives All
doors and Driver door, then all. For a description of the menu system, see page 122.
Approach light duration Used to switch on the car's lighting at a distance. For more information, see page 83.
Boot lid Unlocks and disarms the alarm for the boot lid only. For more information, see page 52.
Panic function Used to attract attention in an emergency.
Press and hold the button for at least 3 sec- onds or press it twice within 3 seconds to acti- vate the direction indicators and the horn.
The function can be turned off with the same button once it has been active for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds.
Range
The remote control key's functions have a range of about 20 m from the car.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed - move closer and try again.
NOTE
The remote control key functions can be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions etc. The car can always be locked/unlocked using the key blade, see page 43.
Unique functions PCC*
G 02
10 80
PCC* - Personal Car Communicator.
Information button
Indicator lamps
Using the information button enables access to certain information from the car via the indica- tor lamps.
Using the information button
Press the information button .
> All indicator lamps flash for approxi- mately 7 seconds and the light travels around on the PCC. This indicates that information from the car has been read.
If any of the other buttons are pressed during this time then the reading is inter- rupted.
NOTE
If none of the indicator lamps illumi- nates with repeated use of the information button and in different locations (as well as after 7 seconds and after the light has trav- elled around on the PCC), contact a work- shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended.
Indicator lamps display information in accord- ance with the following illustration:
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 43
Green continuous light the car is locked.
Yellow continuous light the car is unlocked.
Red continuous light the alarm has been triggered since the car was locked.
Red light flashing alternately in both indi- cator lamps The alarm was triggered less than 5 minutes ago.
Range PCC
The PCC's range for locking, unlocking and boot lid is about 20 m from the car, for other functions up to about 100 m.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed - move closer and try again.
NOTE
The information button functions can be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions etc.
Out of PCC range
If the PCC is too far away from the car for the information to be read then the status the car was last left in is shown, without the light trav- elling around on the PCC.
If several PCCs are used for the car then it is only the PCC last used for locking/unlocking that shows correct status.
NOTE
If no indicator lamps illuminate when the information button is used within range then this may be because the last commu- nication between the PCC and the car was disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions etc.
Detachable key blade
A remote control key contains a detachable key blade of metal with which some functions can be activated and some operations carried out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec- ommended when ordering new key blades.
Key blade functions
Using the remote control key's detachable key blade:
the driver's door can be opened manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key, see page 49.
the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks can be activated/deactivated, see page 55.
access to the glovebox and cargo area (privacy locking*) is blocked, see page 45.
the boot lid can be opened manually if the car has a flat battery, see page 53.
the airbag for front passenger seat (PACOS)* can be activated/deactivated, see page 22.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
44
Removing the key blade
G 02
10 82
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
At the same time pull the key blade straight out backwards.
Attaching the key blade
Carefully refit the key blade into its location in the remote control key.
1. Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot.
2. Lightly press the key blade. You should hear a "click" when the key blade is locked in.
Unlocking doors with the key blade
If central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis- charged, then the driver's door can be opened as follows:
1. Unlock the driver's door with the key blade in the door handle's lock cylinder.
NOTE
When the door has been unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig- gered.
2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch.
For a car with the Keyless system, see page 49.
02 Locks and alarm
Privacy locking*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 45
General information on privacy locking
G 02
10 83
Active locks for remote control key with key blade.
G 02
10 84
Active locks for remote control key, without key blade and privacy locking activated.
The privacy locking function is intended for when the car is left for service, with a hotel parking valet or similar. The glovebox is then
locked and the boot lid lock is disconnected from the central locking - the boot lid cannot be opened with either the central locking but- ton in the front doors or the remote control key.
This means that the remote control key without key blade can only be used to activate/deacti- vate the alarm, to open the doors and to drive the car.
The remote control key without key blade can then be handed over to the service or hotel staff - the loose key blade is retained by the car owner.
Activating/deactivating
G 02
05 08
Activating privacy locking.
To activate privacy locking:
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock cylinder.
Turn the key blade 180 degrees clockwise. The keyhole is vertical in the locked posi- tion for privacy locking.
Pull out the key blade. The information dis- play shows a message at the same time.
The glovebox is then locked and the boot lid can no longer be unlocked with the remote control key or the central locking button.
NOTE
Do not reinsert the key blade into the remote control key but keep it in a safe place instead.
Deactivation takes place in reverse order.
For information on locking the glovebox only, see page 52.
02 Locks and alarm
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*
02
46 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Replacing the battery
The batteries should be replaced if:
the information symbol is illuminated and the display shows Replace car key
battery
and/or
the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within 20 metres from the car.
Opening
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
At the same time pull the key blade straight out backwards.
Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the hole behind the spring-loaded catch and gently prize the remote control key up.
NOTE
Turn the remote control key over with the buttons facing up, this is to avoid the bat- teries falling out when it is opened.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching the battery and its terminals with your fingers, as this could damage their functionality.
Battery replacement
Closely study how the battery/batteries are secured on the inside of the cover, with regard to their (+) and () sides.
Remove control key (1 battery)
1. Carefully prize out the battery. 2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.
PCC* (2 batteries)
1. Carefully prize out the batteries. 2. First install one new one with the (+) side
up. 3. Position the white plastic tab in between
and finally install a second new battery with the (+) side down.
Battery type
Use batteries with the designation CR2430, 3V - one in the remote control key and two in the PCC.
Assembly
1. Press the remote control key together.
2. Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot.
3. Lightly press the key blade. You should hear a "click" when the key blade is locked in.
02 Locks and alarm
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 47
IMPORTANT
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally-friendly way.
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
02
48 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Keyless lock and ignition system (only
PCC1)
General
G 02
05 77
The keyless drive function in the PCC allows the car to be unlocked, driven and locked with- out the need for a key. You simply have to have the PCC with you. The system makes it easier and more convenient to open the car, e.g. when your hands are full.
Both of the car's PCCs incorporate the Keyless function. Additional PCCs can be ordered, see page 40.
PCC range
In order to open a door or the boot lid, a PCC must be no more than approx. 1.5 metres from
the car door handle or boot lid. This means that the person who wishes to lock or unlock a door must have the PCC with him or her. It is not possible to lock or unlock a door if the PCC is on the opposite side of the car.
The red rings in the preceding illustration indi- cate the range covered by the system's anten- nas.
If all PCCs are removed from the car when the engine is running or key position II is active (see page 69) and if all doors are closed, then a warning message is shown in the information display and an audio reminder signal sounds at the same time.
The warning message clears and the audio reminder signal stops when the PCC is brought back to the car after:
a door has been opened and closed
the PCC is inserted into the ignition switch
the READ button has been pressed.
Handling the PCC safely
If a PCC with keyless drive function is left in the car, it is deactivated temporarily when the car is locked. This prevents unauthorised entry.
However, if someone breaks into the car, opens the door and finds the PCC, it can be
reactivated. It is therefore important to handle all PCCs with great care.
IMPORTANT
Never leave a PCC behind in the car.
Interference to PCC function
Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter- fere with the keyless drive system. For this rea- son, do not place the PCC near mobile phones or metallic objects.
If interference is experienced nonetheless, use the PCC and the key blade as a remote control key., see page 41.
1 Personal Car Communicator, see page 42.
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 49
Locking
Cars with the keyless system have a button on the outside door handles.
Lock the doors and the boot lid by pressing the lock button on one of the door handles on the outside.
All doors and the boot lid must be closed before the car can be locked - otherwise the car is not locked.
NOTE
On cars with automatic transmission, the gear selector must be set in the P position otherwise the car cannot be locked or the alarm armed.
Unlocking
Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a door handle or the boot lid's rubberised pres- sure plate is actuated - open the door or boot lid as normal.
Unlocking with the key blade
If central locking cannot be activated with the PCC, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, then the driver's door can be opened with the PCC's detachable key blade (see page 43).
To access the lock cylinder the door handle's plastic cover must be detached:
1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight up into the hole on the underside of the door handle/cover - do not prize.
> The plastic cover is prized loose auto- matically by the torque when the blade is pushed straight up and into the open- ing.
2. Insert the key blade in the lock cylinder and unlock the door.
3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.
NOTE
When the driver's door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig- gered. It is switched off by inserting the PCC in the ignition switch, see page 57.
Key memory2 driver's seat and door
mirrors
PCC memory function
If several people each with a PCC approach the car, then the settings for seat and mirrors are implemented for the person who opens the driver's door.
After the driver's door has been opened by person A with PCC-A, but person B with PCC- B shall drive, the settings can be changed in three ways:
Standing by the driver's door, or sitting behind the steering wheel, person B
2 Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
02
50 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
presses their PCC's unlock button, see page 41.
Select one of three possible memories for seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see page 72.
Adjust seat and mirrors manually, see page 72 and 91.
Lock settings
The Keyless function can be adapted by indi- cating in the menu system which doors shall be unlocked, under Car settings Lock
settings Keyless entry.
For a description of the menu system, see page 122.
Antenna location
G 02
04 79
The keyless system has a number of integrated antennae located around the car:
Rear bumper, centre, inside
Door handle, left rear
Parcel shelf, centre, underside
Roof, centre above rear seat
Door handle, right rear
Centre console, under the rear section
Centre console, under the front section.
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless system's antennae with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless system.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 51
From the outside
The remote control key can lock/unlock all doors and the boot lid simultaneously. Differ- ent sequences for unlocking can be selected, see Unlocking with the remote control key, page 41.
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the remote control key, the battery may be dis- charged - lock or unlock the driver's door with the detachable key blade, see page 43.
WARNING
Be aware that there is a risk that you can be locked in the car if it is locked from the out- side.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened within 2 minutes of unlocking, all are locked again automatically. This function reduces the risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally. (For cars with alarm, see page 56.)
From the inside
Central locking
Central locking.
All of the doors and the boot lid can be locked or unlocked simultaneously using the central locking button on either front door.
Press one side of the button to lock - the other side to unlock.
Unlocking
A door can be unlocked from the inside in two different ways:
Press the central locking button .
Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to also open all the side windows* simultaneously.
Pull the door handle once and release - the door is unlocked. Pull the door handle again to open the door.
Locking
Press the central locking button after the front doors have been closed.
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to also close all the side windows and the sunroof* simultaneously.
All doors can also be individually locked man- ually with their lock buttons - the door in ques- tion must then be closed.
Global opening
Press and hold the central locking button (at least 4 seconds) to also open all the win- dows simultaneously - for example, to quickly ventilate the passenger compartment during hot weather.
Automatic locking
The doors and boot lid are locked automati- cally when the car starts to move.
The function can be activated/deactivated under Car settings Lock settings
Doors automatic lock. (For a description of the menu system, see page 122.)
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
52 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Glovebox
G 02
05 48
The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked using the remote control key's detachable key blade. (For information on the key blade, see page 43).
Locking the glovebox:
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock cylinder.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. The keyhole is horizontal in the locked position.
Pull out the key blade.
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.
For information on privacy locking, see page 45.
Boot lid
Unlocking with the remote control key
The alarm for the boot lid can be disarmed* and the boot lid unlocked and opened on its own by using the remote control key's button.
If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm indicator on the instrument panel stops to show that alarm for the whole of the car is not armed. The alarm's level and movement sen- sors and the sensors for opening the boot lid are disconnected.
The doors remain locked and armed.
The boot lid can be opened in two
different ways
One press - The boot lid is unlocked, but remains closed - press lightly on the rubberised
pressure plate under the outer handle and lift the boot lid.
If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.
Two presses - The boot lid is unlocked and the lock plunger is disengaged at which the boot lid opens about a centimetre - lift the outer handle to open. Rain, cold, frost or snow could prevent the tailgate from disengaging from the lock plunger.
NOTE
When the boot lid/tailgate is unlocked with 2 presses, automatic relocking does not take place because the boot lid/tailgate is open - it must be closed manually.
After the boot lid/tailgate has been closed it is unlocked and the alarm is not armed - relock it and re-arm the alarm with the remote control key's lock button .
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 53
Unlocking the car from inside
To unlock/open the boot lid:
Press the lighting panel button (1) - the lock plunger releases and the boot lid is opened a few centimetres.
Unlocking with the key blade
The boot lid can be opened manually with the key blade if the car's battery is discharged - the boot lid cannot then be opened with the light- ing panel button.
Prize loose the lock cylinder's cover.
Unlock the boot lid by turning the key blade one half turn anticlockwise as illustrated.
3. Refit the cover.
Locking with the remote control key
Press the remote control key's button for locking, , see page 41.
If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm indicator on the instrument panel starts to flash, which means that the alarm is armed.
Deadlocks * 1
Deadlocks means that all lock buttons and door handles are mechanically disengaged, which prevents doors being opened from the inside.
The deadlocks are activated with the remote control key and are set after an approximately 10 second delay after the doors have been locked.
NOTE
If a door is opened within the delay time then the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deactivated.
The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock state with the remote control key. The driver's door can also be unlocked with the detachable key blade.
1 Only in combination with alarm.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
54 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Temporary deactivation
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
Navigation
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
If someone is going to stay in the car but the doors must be locked from the outside, then the deadlocks function can be temporarily switched off. This is carried out as follows:
1. Access the menu system under Car
settings (for a detailed description of the menu system, see page 122).
2. Select Reduced guard.
3. Select Activate once.
> The instrument panel display shows the message Reduced guard See
manual and the deadlocks function is switched off when the car is locked.
or
Select Ask on exit. > Each time the engine is switched off the
audio system's display shows the mes- sage Press ENTER to reduce guard
until engine is started Press EXIT to
cancel. - then select one of the follow- ing alternatives:
If you want to switch off deadlocks
Press ENTER and lock the car. (Note that the alarm's movement and tilt detectors* are switched off at the same time, see page 56.) > The next time the engine is started, the
system is reset to zero and the instru- ment panel display shows the message Full guard at which the deadlocks function and the alarm's movement and tilt detectors are re-engaged.
If you do not want to change the locking
system
Select no options at all and lock the car.
or
Press EXIT and lock the car.
NOTE
Remember that the car's alarm is armed when the car is locked.
If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm will be triggered.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the deadlocks to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.
02 Locks and alarm
Child safety locks
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 55
Manual blocking of the rear doors
The child safety locks prevent children from opening a rear door from the inside.
G 02
10 77
The child safety locks are located on the trailing edge of the rear doors and are only accessible when the doors are open.
To activate/deactivate the child safety locks:
Use the remote control key's detachable key blade to turn the knob, see page 43.
The door is blocked against opening from the inside.
The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside.
NOTE
A door's knob control only blocks that particular door - not both rear doors simultaneously.
Cars with an electric child safety lock do not have a manual child lock.
Electrical locking of the rear doors* and power windows
Control panel driver's door.
When the electric child safety lock is active then the rear:
windows can only be opened with the driv- er's door control panel
doors cannot be opened from inside.
The child safety locks are activated/deacti- vated in all key positions (see page 69 and up to 2 minutes after the remote control key has been removed from the ignition switch. If a door is opened within this time, the function is deactivated.
Press the button in the driver's door control panel. > The information display shows the mes-
sage Rear child locks Activated and the button's lamp illuminates when the locks are active.
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
02
56 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
Activated alarm is triggered if:
a door, the bonnet or the boot lid is opened
a movement is detected in the passenger compartment (if fitted with a movement detector*)
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with a tilt detector*)
the battery's cable is disconnected
the siren is disconnected.
If there is a fault in the alarm system, the infor- mation display shows a message. In which case, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in the event of movement in the passenger compartment - air currents are also regis- tered. For this reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left with a window or the sunroof open or if the passenger compartment heater is used.
To avoid this: Close the window/sunroof when leaving the car. If the car's integrated passenger compartment heater (or a porta- ble electric heater) shall be used - direct the airflow from the air vents so that they are not pointing upwards in the passenger com- partment.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm system components. All such attempts could affect the terms of insurance.
Alarm indicator
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the alarm system's status:
LED not lit Alarm not armed
The LED flashes once every other second Alarm is armed
The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the alarm (and until the remote control key is inserted in the ignition switch and key posi- tion I is selected) Alarm has been trig- gered.
Arming the alarm
Press the remote control key lock button.
Disarming the alarm
Press the remote control key unlock but- ton.
Deactivating a triggered alarm
Press the remote control key unlock button or insert the remote control key in the igni- tion switch.
Other alarm functions
Automatic re-arming of the alarm
This function prevents the car being left with alarm disarmed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the doors or the boot lid is opened within 2 minutes, then the alarm is automatically re- armed. The car is relocked at the same time.
Alarm signals
When the alarm is triggered, the following hap- pens:
A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the alarm is switched off. The siren has its own
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 57
battery which works independently of the car battery.
The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off.
Remote control key not working
If the alarm cannot be switched off with the remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery is discharged, the car can be disarmed and the engine started as follows:
1. Open the driver's door with the key blade. > The alarm is triggered, the alarm indica-
tor flashes rapidly and the siren sounds.
2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch. > The alarm is deactivated and the alarm
indicator goes out.
3. Start the engine.
Reduced alarm level
To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm - e.g. if a dog is left in the car or during transport on a car train or a car ferry - the movement and tilt sensors can be temporarily deactivated.
The procedure is the same as with the tempo- rary disengaging of deadlocks, see page 53.
Testing the alarm system
Testing the movement detector in the
passenger compartment
1. Close all windows. Remain in the car.
2. Arm the alarm, see page 56.
3. Wait 15 seconds.
4. Trigger the alarm by moving your arms for- ward and back at backrest height. > A siren sounds and all direction indica-
tors flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key.
Testing the alarm sensors in the doors
1. Arm the alarm, see page 56.
2. Wait 15 seconds.
3. Unlock the driver's door using the key blade.
4. Open the driver's door. > A siren sounds and all direction indica-
tors flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key.
Testing the alarm sensors for the bonnet
1. Sit in the car and deactivate the movement sensor, see the previous section Reduced alarm level.
2. Arm the alarm, see page 56. Remain in the car and lock the doors with the button on the remote control key.
3. Wait 15 seconds.
4. Open the bonnet with the handle under the dashboard. > A siren sounds and all direction indica-
tors flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key.
58 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Instruments and controls........................................................................ 60 Instruments and controls - Executive .................................................... 68 Key positions.......................................................................................... 69 Seats....................................................................................................... 71 Seats - Executive.................................................................................... 75 Steering wheel........................................................................................ 77 Lighting................................................................................................... 78 Wipers and washing................................................................................ 87 Windows, rearview and door mirrors...................................................... 89 Compass*................................................................................................ 94 Power sunroof*....................................................................................... 95 Alcoguard*.............................................................................................. 97 Starting the engine................................................................................ 101 Starting the engine Flexifuel............................................................... 103 Starting the engine external battery................................................... 105 Gearboxes............................................................................................. 106 All-wheel drive AWD*......................................................................... 111 Foot brake............................................................................................. 112 Parking brake........................................................................................ 114
HomeLink *.......................................................................................... 117
YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
60
Instrument overview
Left-hand drive.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61
Function Page
Menus and messages, direction indicators, main/dipped beam, trip computer
78, 81, 126, 159
Cruise control 164, 166
Horn, airbags 20, 77
Combined instrument panel
63, 67
Menu, audio and phone control
122, 141, 200
Ignition switch 69
Start/stop button 101
Hazard warning flashers 81
Door handle
Control panel 51, 55, 89, 91
Menu control and audio system
122, 142
Climate control, ECC 132
Function Page
Gear selector 106
Controls for active chas- sis (Four-C)*
163
Wipers and washing 87, 88
Steering wheel adjust- ment
77
Parking brake 114
Bonnet opener 248
Seat adjustment* 71
Headlamp control, opener for fuel filler flap and boot lid
52, 78, 215
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
62
Right-hand drive.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 63
Function Page
Hazard warning flashers 81
Ignition switch 69
Start/stop button 101
Cruise control 164, 166
Combined instrument panel
63, 67
Horn, airbags 20, 77
Menu, audio and phone control
122, 141, 200
Wipers and washing 87, 88
Headlamp control, opener for fuel filler flap and boot lid
52, 78, 215
Door handle
Control panel 51, 55, 89, 91
Seat adjustment* 71
Bonnet opener 248
Parking brake 114
Function Page
Steering wheel adjust- ment
77
Menus and messages, direction indicators, main/dipped beam, trip computer
78, 81, 126, 159
Controls for active chas- sis (Four-C)*
163
Gear selector 106
Climate control, ECC 132
Menu control and audio system
122, 142
Information displays
The information displays show information on some of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control, trip computer and messages. The information is shown with text and symbols.
There are further descriptions under the func- tions that use the information displays.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
64
Meters
Meters in the combined instrument panel.
Speedometer
Fuel gauge. See also Trip computer, page 159, and Refuelling, page 215.
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Indicator, information and warning symbols
Indicator and warning symbols.
Main beam and direction indicator symbol
Indicator and information symbols
Indicator and warning symbols1
Functionality check
All indicator and warning symbols illuminate in key position II or when the engine is started. When the engine has started, all the symbols should go out except the parking brake sym- bol, which only goes out when the brake is dis- engaged.
If the engine does not start or if the functionality check is carried out in key position II then all
symbols go out after 5 seconds except the symbol for faults in the car's emissions system and the symbol for low oil pressure.
Indicator and information symbols
Sym- bol
Specification
ABL fault
Emissions system
ABS fault
Rear fog lamp on
Stability system
Engine preheater (diesel)
Low level in fuel tank
Information, read display text
Main beam On
1 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text. For information on checking the oil level, see page 249.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
65
Sym- bol
Specification
Left-hand direction indicators
Right-hand direction indicators
ABL fault
The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in the ABL function (Active Bending Lights).
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then the system is not working. The car's regular brake system con- tinues to work, but without the ABS function.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to a workshop to have the ABS system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Rear fog lamp on
This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp is on. There is only one fog lamp. It is located on the driver's side.
Stability system
A flashing symbol indicates that the stability system is operating. If the symbol illuminates with constant glow then there is a fault in the system.
Engine preheater (diesel)
This symbol illuminates during engine preheat- ing. Preheating occurs when the temperature is below 2 C. The car can be started once the symbol goes out.
Low level in fuel tank
When the symbol illuminates the level in the fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems does not behave as intended, this information symbol illuminates and a text appears on the informa- tion display. The message text is cleared with the READ button, see page 126, or it disap- pears automatically after a time (time depend- ing on which function is indicated). The infor- mation symbol can also illuminate in conjunc- tion with other symbols.
NOTE
When a service message is shown, the sym- bol and message are cleared using the READ button, or clear automatically after a while.
Main beam On
The symbol illuminates when main beam is on and with main beam flash
Left/right-hand direction indicators
Both direction indicator symbols flash when the hazard warning flashers are used.
Indicator and warning symbols
Symbol Specification
Low oil pressureA
Parking brake applied
Airbags SRS
Seatbelt reminder
Alternator not charging
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
66
Symbol Specification
Fault in brake system
Warning
A For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text, see pages 249 and 250.
Low oil pressure
If this symbol illuminates during driving then the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the engine immediately and check the engine oil level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illumi- nates and the oil level is normal, contact a workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo work- shop.
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates with a constant glow when the parking brake is applied. The symbol flashes during application, and then changes over to a constant glow.
A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen. Read the message on the information display.
Airbags SRS
If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means a fault has been detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop
to have the system checked. Volvo recom- mends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol illuminates if someone in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.
Alternator not charging
This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo work- shop.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 253.
If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake force distribution system.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine.
2. Restart the engine.
If both symbols extinguish, continue driving.
If the symbols remain illuminated, check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see
page 253. If the brake fluid level is nor- mal but the symbols are still illuminated, the car can be driven, with great care, to a workshop to have the brake system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
The loss of brake fluid must be investigated by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the brake and ABS symbols are illumi- nated at the same time, there is a risk that the rear end will skid during heavy braking.
Warning
The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. An explan- atory text is shown on the information display at the same time. The symbol remains visible until the fault has been rectified but the text message can be cleared with the READ but- ton, see page 126. The warning symbol can
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 67
also illuminate in conjunction with other sym- bols.
Action:
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car further.
2. Read the information on the information display. Implement the action in accord- ance with the message in the display. Clear the message using the READ button.
Reminder doors not closed
If one of the doors, the bonnet2 or boot lid is not closed properly then the information or warning symbol illuminates together with an explanatory text message in the combined instrument panel. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the door, bonnet or boot lid, whichever is open.
If the car is driven at a speed lower than approx. 7 km/h then the information
symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx. 7 km/h then the warning
symbol illuminates.
Trip meter
Trip meter and controls.
Display for trip meter
Controls for switching between trip meters T1 and T2, as well as resetting the trip meters.
The meters are used to measure short dis- tances.
One short press on the control switches between the two trip meters T1 and T2. A long press (more than 2 seconds) resets an active trip meter to zero. The distance is shown in the display.
Clock
Clock and setting knob.
Controls for setting the clock.
Information display for showing the time.
Turn the knob clockwise/anticlockwise to set the time. The set time is shown in the informa- tion display.
The clock can be temporarily replaced by a symbol in conjunction with a message, see page 126.
2 Only cars with alarm*.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls - Executive
03
68
Analogue clock
G 02
90 76
Analogue clock.
Button for setting indicator backwards in time.
Button for setting indicator forwards in time.
The analogue clock is located in the instrument panel above the glovebox.
To set the time:
Use the appropriate button to move the indicators either forward or back in time. Setting can be made by means of two methods:
Hold the button depressed - the indica- tor is first moved slowly in time, equiv- alent to about 5 minutes, then faster.
Release the button when the clock shows the correct time.
Press the button again - the indicator is moved about 10 seconds in time.
03 Your driving environment
Key positions
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 69
Insert and remove the remote control key
G 02
11 26
Ignition switch with inserted remote control key.
NOTE
For cars with keyless function*, see page 48.
Insert the key
Hold the end of the remote control key with the detachable key blade and insert the key in the ignition switch. After a gentle press on the key it is drawn into the lock.
IMPORTANT
Foreign objects in the ignition switch may jeopardise the function or destroy the lock.
Do not press the remote control key incor- rectly turned - Hold the end with the detach- able key blade, see page 43.
Withdraw the key
The remote control key is ejected after a gentle press on it. (Automatic gearbox* must be in position P.)
Functions
The remote control key's 3 different key posi- tions can be reached without the need to start the engine. The table shows the functions available in each key position.
NOTE
To reach key position I or II without starting the engine - do not depress the brake/ clutch pedal when the following operations are carried out.
Key position 0
Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and gently press it - The key is drawn into the lock.
Key position I
With the remote control key inserted into the ignition switch - Briefly press on START/STOP
ENGINE.
Key position II
With the remote control key inserted into the ignition switch - Press on START/STOP
ENGINE for about 2 seconds.
Back to key position 0
To return to key position 0 from position I or II - Briefly press on START/STOP ENGINE.
03 Your driving environment
Key positions
03
70 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Posi- tion
Function
0 Odometer, clock and tempera- ture gauge are illuminated. The steering lock is deactivated. The audio system can be used.
I Sunroof*, power windows, 12 V socket in the passenger compart- ment, RTI*, phone*, ventilation fan, ECC and windscreen wipers can be used.
II The headlamps come on. Warn- ing/indicator lamps illuminate for 5 seconds. All equipment oper- ates apart from heated seats and rear window defroster, which only work when the engine is running.
For information on the audio system's func- tions with remote control key removed, see page 141.
Starting and stopping the engine
For information about starting/switching off the engine, see page 101.
Towing
For important information about the remote control key during towing, see page 229.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 71
Front seats
Lumbar support adjustment, turn the wheel1.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust the distance to the steering wheel and ped- als. Check that the seat is locked after changing position.
Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion, pump up/down.
Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Control panel for power seat*.
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat before setting off, never while driving. Make sure that the seat is in locked position in order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident.
Lowering the front seat backrest
The passenger seat backrest can be folded forward to make room for long loads.
Move the seat as far back/down as possi- ble.
Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest and fold it forward.
4. Push the seat forward so that the head restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
WARNING
Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is properly locked after being folded up in order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident.
1 Also applies to power seat.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Power seat*
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Seat forward/backward and up/down
Backrest rake
The power front seats have overload protection which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this happens, go to key position I or 0 and wait a short time before adjusting the seat again.
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down) can be made at a time.
Preparations
The seats can be adjusted for a certain time after unlocking the door with the remote con-
trol key without the key in the ignition switch. Seat adjustment is normally made in key posi- tion I and can always be made when the engine is running.
Seat with memory function*
Store setting
Memory button
Memory button
Memory button
Button for storing settings
1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
2. Hold the button depressed to store set- tings while depressing one of the memory buttons.
Using a stored setting
Hold one of the memory buttons depressed until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you release the button then the movement of the seat will stop.
Key memory* in remote control key2
The positions of the driver's seat and the door mirrors3 are stored in the key memory when the car is locked with the remote control key.
When the car is unlocked with the same remote control key it was locked with and the driver's
2 For key memory for keyless drive, see page 49. 3 Only if the car is equipped with power seat and retractable power door mirrors.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 73
door is opened, the driver's seat and also the door mirrors automatically adopt the positions stored in the key memory.
NOTE
The seat and the door mirrors do not move if they are already set the relevant position.
It is also possible to use the key memory by pressing the unlock button on the remote con- trol key when the driver's door is open.
The key memory can be activated/deactivated under Car Key memory Seat & mirror
positions. For a description of the menu sys- tem, see page 122.
NOTE
The key memory in the two remote control keys and the seat's three memories are completely independent of each other.
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one of the buttons to stop the seat.
Restarting to reach the seat position stored in the key memory is performed by pressing the unlock button on the remote control key. The driver's door must then be open.
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do not play with the controls. Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment. Ensure that none of the backseat passengers will be trapped.
Heated/ventilated seats*
For heated/ventilated seats, see page 132.
Rear seats
Lowering the rear seat backrest
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat when the backrest is to be folded down. The seat belts must not be connected either. Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the rear seat upholstery.
The backrest is in two sections, they can be folded forward, together or separately.
1. Pull the handle(s). First raise the head restraints if they are lowered.
2. Fold the backrest forward. Lower the cen- tre head restraint fully if the backrest's wide section shall be lowered.
WARNING
Take hold of the backrests and make sure they are locked properly after opening them out in order to prevent injury under hard braking or in the event of an accident.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
03
74 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Head restraint, centre seat, rear
The head restraint can be adjusted vertically to suit the height of the passenger. The upper edge of the head restraint should be aligned with middle of the back of the head. Slide it up as required.
To lower the head restraint again the button by the left-hand shaft must be pressed in while the head restraint is pressed down.
Electrical lowering of the rear seat's
outer head restraints*
1. The remote control key must be in position I or II.
2. Press the button to lower the rear outer head restraints to improve rearward visi- bility.
WARNING
Do not lower the outer head restraints if there are any passengers using of the outer seats.
Move the head restraint back manually until a click is heard.
WARNING
The head restraints must be in locked posi- tion after being raised.
03 Your driving environment
Seats - Executive
03
75
Comfort seats, front
G 03
01 31
Adjusting the seat, front - rear.
Control panel for massage and lumbar.
Massage
G 03
01 32
Button for activating massage.
Hard massage
Soft massage
Each front seat has massage in the backrest. The massage is performed by air cushions that can massage with either a hard or soft setting. When one of the settings is selected the mas- sage is carried out in accordance with the cycle: massage 6 minutes - pause 4 minutes - massage 6 minutes etc.
When the button is in the centre position, or when the remote control key is in position 0, massage is not activated.
Setting lumbar
G 03
02 27
Button for setting lumbar.
The lumbar support is set with the same air cushions used for massage. Adjustment can be made steplessly both in terms of depth and height using the control button, see the illus- tration above.
Lumbar support can be set when massage is not active.
A memory function recalls the lumbar setting when massage is stopped or when the pres- sure in the air cushions has decreased, e.g. after a longer period of parking.
03 Your driving environment
Seats - Executive
03
76
Adjusting the seat, front - rear
G 03
01 37
The illustration above shows a left-hand drive car.
The passenger seat can be adjusted front - rear. The seat can be moved forward or back- ward as long as the front or rear part of the button respectively is held depressed, see illustration above. The angle of the backrest is not changed.
03 Your driving environment
Steering wheel
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77
Adjusting
G 02
11 38
Adjusting the steering wheel.
Lever - releasing the steering wheel
Possible steering wheel positions
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and depth:
1. Pull the lever towards you to release the steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you.
3. Push back the lever to fix the steering wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you push the lever back.
WARNING
Adjust and secure the steering wheel before driving.
With speed related power steering* the level of steering force can be adjusted, see page 163.
Keypads*
Keypads in the steering wheel.
Cruise control, see page 164
Adaptive cruise control, see page 166
Audio and phone control, see page 141
Horn
Horn.
Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Light switches
G 02
11 41
Overview, light switches.
Thumbwheel1 for adjusting display and instrument lighting
Rear fog lamp
Front fog lamps*
Light switches
Thumbwheel2 for headlamp levelling
Instrument lighting
Different display and instrument lighting is switched on depending on key position, see page 69.
The display lighting is automatically subdued in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the thumbwheel.
The intensity of the instrument lighting is adjusted with the thumbwheel.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical align- ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz- zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the height of the beam. Lower the beam if the car is heavily laden.
1. Allow the engine to run or have the remote control key in position I.
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/ lower beam alignment.
Cars with Xenon headlamps* have automatic headlamp levelling and therefore do not have the thumbwheel.
Main/dipped beam
G 02
11 42
Headlamp control and stalk switch.
Position for main beam flash
Position for main beam
1 For cars equipped with Executive, the thumbwheel also adjusts brightness for auxiliary lighting in handles, storage compartments in doors, analogue clock, cup holder in tunnel console and front floor lighting.
2 Not available for cars equipped with Xenon headlamps*.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79
Posi- tion
Specification
AutomaticA/deactivated dipped beam. Only main beam flash.
Position/parking lamps
Dipped beam. Main beam and main beam flash work in this position.
A Applies to certain markets.
NOTE
Main beam can only be activated in position .
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch gently towards the steer- ing wheel to the position for main beam flash. Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is released.
Dipped beam
When the engine is started, dipped beam is activated automatically3 if the headlamp con- trol is in position . If necessary, auto- matic dipped beam for this position can be
deactivated by a workshop. Volvo recom- mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
In position dipped beam is always acti- vated automatically when the engine is running or when the remote control key is in position II.
Main beam
Main beam can only be activated when the headlamp control is in position . Acti- vate/deactivate main beam by moving the stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position and release.
When main beam has been activated the sym- bol illuminates in the combined instru- ment panel.
Active Xenon headlamps - ABL*
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right) respectively.
If the car is equipped with active Xenon head- lamps (Active Bending Lights - ABL) the light from the headlamps follows the steering wheel movement in order to provide maximum light- ing in bends and junctions and so provide increased safety.
The function is activated automatically when the car is started. In the event of a fault in the function the symbol illuminates in the combined instrument panel at the same time as the information display shows an explana- tory text and a further illuminated symbol.
3 Applies to certain markets.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
80
Symbol Display Specifica- tion
Headlamp
failure
Service
required
The system is disen- gaged. Visit a workshop if the mes- sage remains. Volvo rec- ommends that you contact an authorised Volvo work- shop.
The function is only active in twilight or dark- ness and only when the car is moving.
The function4 can be activated/deactivated under Car settings Light settings
Active bending lights. For a description of the menu system, see page 122.
For headlamp pattern adjustment, see page 83.
Position/parking lamps
G 02
11 44
Headlamp control in position for position/parking lamps.
Turn the headlamp control to the centre posi- tion (number plate lighting comes on at the same time).
Rear position lamps also come on when the boot lid is opened in order to alert anybody behind.
Brake lights
The brake light automatically comes on during braking. For information on the Emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers, see page 112.
Front fog lamps
G 02
11 45
Button for front fog lamps.
The front fog lamps* can be switched on along with main/dipped beam or position/parking lamps.
Press the button for on/off. The light in the but- ton illuminates when the fog lamps are on.
4 Activated on delivery from the factory.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
81
NOTE
Regulations for using front fog lamps vary between different countries.
Rear fog lamp
G 02
11 46
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp consists of one rear lamp and can only be switched on in combination with main/dipped beam or the front fog lamps.
Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog lamp indicator symbol on the combined instrument panel and the light in the button illu- minate when the rear fog lamp is switched on.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically when the engine is switched off.
NOTE
Regulations for using rear fog lamps vary between different countries.
Hazard warning flashers
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in the combined instrument panel flash when the hazard warning flashers are in use.
The hazard warning flashers are activated automatically when the car brakes so suddenly that the emergency brake lights are activated and speed is below 30 km/h. They remain on when the car has stopped and are deactivated automatically when the car is driven off again or the button is depressed. For more informa-
tion on Emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers, see page 112.
Direction indicators/flashers
G 02
11 48
Direction indicators/flashers.
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the first position and release. The direction indicators flash three times. The function can be activated/deactivated under Car
settings Light settings Turn
indicators, 3-
flash. For a description of the menu sys- tem, see page 123.
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the outer position.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
82
The stalk switch remains in its position and is moved back manually, or automatically by the steering wheel movement.
Direction indicator symbols
For direction indicator symbols, see page 64.
Interior lighting
G 02
11 49
Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Interior lighting
All lighting in the passenger compartment can be switched on and off manually within 30 minutes from when:
the engine has been switched off and the remote control key is in position 0
the car has been unlocked but the engine has not been started.
Front roof lighting
The front reading lamps are switched on or off by pressing the relevant button in the roof con- sole.
Rear roof lighting
G 02
11 50
Rear roof lighting.
The lamps are switched on or off by pressing each respective button.
Courtesy lighting
Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart- ment lighting) is switched on and off respec- tively when a side door is opened or closed.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror
The lighting for the vanity mirror, see page 198, is switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed.
Automatic lighting
The switch for passenger compartment light- ing has three positions for the lighting in the passenger compartment:
Off right-hand side depressed, automatic lighting deactivated.
Neutral position automatic lighting acti- vated.
On left-hand side depressed, passenger compartment lighting on.
Neutral position
When the button is in neutral position the pas- senger compartment lighting is switched on and off automatically in accordance with the following.
The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:
the car is unlocked with the remote control key or key blade, see pages 41 or 44
the engine is switched off and the remote control key is in position 0.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
83
Passenger compartment lighting is switched off when:
the engine is started
the car is locked.
The passenger compartment lighting comes on and remains on for two minutes if one of the doors is open.
If any lighting is switched on manually and the car is locked then it will be switched off auto- matically after two minutes.
Home safe light duration
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept switched on to work as home safe lighting after the car has been locked.
1. Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch.
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the steering wheel to the end position and release it. The function can be activated in the same way as with main beam flash, see page 78.
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
When the function is activated, dipped beam, parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the home safe lighting should be kept on can be set under Car
settings Light settings Home safe light
duration. For a description of the menu sys- tem, see page 122.
Approach light duration
Approach lighting is switched on with the remote control key, see page 41, and is used to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.
When the function is activated with the remote control, parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the approach light- ing should be kept on can be set under Car
settings Light settings Approach light
duration. For a description of the menu sys- tem, see page 122.
Adjusting headlamp pattern
G 02
11 51
Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic.
G 02
11 52
Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic.
The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can be set for right or left-hand traffic. The correct pat- tern will also better illuminate the verge.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
84 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Xenon headlamps*
G 01
94 42
Headlamp control for adjusting headlamp pattern.
Normal position the headlamp pattern is correct for the country in which the car was delivered.
Adapted position designed for opposite headlamp pattern.
WARNING
The headlamps must be handled with extreme care due to the Xenon lamp being supplied from a high-voltage unit.
The country in which the car is delivered deter- mines whether normal position is designed for right or left-hand traffic.
Example 1
If a car that is delivered in Sweden shall be driven in the UK then the headlamps must be set to the adjusted position, see preceding illustration.
Example 2
A car that is delivered in the UK is designed for left-hand traffic and is driven there with the headlamps in normal position, see preceding illustration.
Halogen headlamps
The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens. The headlamp pattern may not be as good.
Masking the headlamps
1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand drive cars or the C and D templates for right-hand drive cars with a scale of 1:2, see page 86. Use a photocopier with a zoom function for example:
A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right lens)
B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens)
C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right lens)
D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left lens)
2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive waterproof material and cut it out.
3. Start from the design line on the headlamp lenses, see the dotted line on the side 85. Position the self-adhesive templates at the right distance from each design line using the illustration and the dimensions in the following list:
A = LHD Right - approx. 86 mm
B = LHD Left - approx. 40 mm
C = RHD Right - 0 mm
D = RHD Left - approx. 96 mm
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
85
Aligning the templates
G 03
39 54
Upper row: masking left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: masking right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
86
Templates for halogen headlamps
G 02
11 55
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 87
Windscreen wipers1
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.
Rain sensor, on/off
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0 to switch off the windscreen wipers.
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch and release to make one sweep.
Intermittent wiping
Set the number of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel when inter-
mittent wiping is selected.
Continuous wiping
The wipers sweep at normal speed.
The wipers sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers during winter - ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the wind- screen is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- screen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.
Service position wiper blade
For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades and replacement of wiper blades see see page 262 and 275.
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor automatically starts the wind- screen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of
the rain sensor can be adjusted using the thumbwheel.
When the rain sensor is activated a light in the button the rain sensor symbol is shown in the right-hand display in the combined instrument panel.
Activating and setting the sensitivity
When activating the rain sensor, the car must be running or the remote control key in position I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button . The windscreen wipers make one
sweep.
Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make an extra sweep.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensi- tivity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned upward.)
Deactivating
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but- ton or move the stalk switch down to another wiper program.
1 Replacing the wiper blades see page 262, service position, wiper blade see page 262 and filling washer fluid see page 263.
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
03
88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch or five minutes after the engine has been switched off.
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash. Deac- tivate the rain sensor while the car is running or the remote control key is in position I or II. The symbol in the combined instrument panel and the lamp in the button go out.
Washing the headlamps and windows
G 02
54 16
Washing function.
Washing the windscreen
Move the stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers.
The windscreen wipers will make several more sweeps and the headlamps are washed once the stalk switch has been released.
Heated washer nozzles*
The washer nozzles are heated automatically in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid freezing solid.
High-pressure headlamp washing*
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the headlamps are washed automatically at every fifth windscreen wash cycle.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 89
General
Laminated glass
The glass is reinforced which pro- vides better protection against break-ins and improved sound insu- lation in the passenger compartment.
The windscreen and the side windows* have laminated glass.
Water and dirt-repellent coating*
The front side windows are treated with a coating that improves the view
in difficult weather conditions. Maintenance, see page 276.
IMPORTANT
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice from the windows. Use the defroster to remove ice from the mirrors, see page 93.
Heat-reflecting windscreen*
Areas where IR film is not applied.
Dimensions
A 47 mm
B 87 mm
The windscreen is equipped with a heat- reflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat radiation into the passenger compartment.
The positioning of electronic equipment, such as a transponder, behind a glass surface with heat-reflecting film may affect its function and performance.
For the optimal function of electronic equip- ment, it should be positioned on the part of the
windscreen with no heat-reflecting film (see the highlighted area in the above illustration).
Power windows
G 01
85 16
Driver's door control panel.
Switch for electric child safety locks* and disengaging rear power window buttons, see page 55.
Rear window controls
Front window controls
WARNING
Check that none of the rear seat passengers is in danger of becoming trapped in any way when closing the windows from the driver's door.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
90
WARNING
Make sure that children or other passengers are not in danger of becoming trapped in any way when closing the windows, in par- ticular when the remote control key is used.
WARNING
If there are children in the car, remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.
Operating
G 01
85 17
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto
Operating with auto
All power windows can be operated using the control panel in the driver's door. Each control panel in the other doors can only control its own respective power window. The power win- dows can only be controlled with one control panel at a time.
In order that the power windows can be used the remote control key must be in position I or II. After the car has been running the power windows can be operated for several minutes even when the remote control key has been removed, but not however after the door has been opened.
Closing of the windows is stopped and the window is opened if anything prevents its movement. It is possible to force the pinch pro- tection when closing has been interrupted, e.g. with ice, by continuously holding the button up until the window is closed. The pinch protec- tion is reactivated after a brief pause.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.
Operating without auto
Move one of the controls up/down gently. The power windows move up/down as long as the control is held in position.
Operating with auto
Move one of the controls up/down to the end position and release it. The window runs auto- matically to its end position.
Operating with the remote control key
and central locking
To remotely operate the power windows from the outside with the remote control key or from inside with central locking, see pages 41 and 51
Resetting
If the battery is disconnected then the function for automatic opening must be reset so that it can work correctly.
1. Gently raise the front section of the button to raise the window to its end position and hold it there for one second.
2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again for one second.
WARNING
Resetting must be carried out to ensure that pinch protection works.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 91
Sun blinds*
Rear door
Hook with associated catch
Sun blinds are built into the panel on each rear door.
1. Pull up the sun blind and hook it into the hook in the upper door frame.
2. Lock the sun blind by moving the catch upwards.
The window can also be opened and closed when the sun blind is pulled up.
Rear window
There is a sun blind built into the rear parcel shelf.
Pull up the sun blind and hook it into the roof clip using the two hooks for the blind. > The spring force in the blind keeps the
hooks in position.
When the sun blind is not in use - unhook it, hold onto the handle and allow the blind to roll up slowly.
Door mirrors
G 01
85 18
Door mirror controls.
Adjusting
1. Press the L button for the left-hand door mirror or the R button for the right-hand door mirror. The light in the button illumi- nates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the centre.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light should no longer be illuminated.
WARNING
The mirrors are the wide angle type for opti- mum surveillance. Objects may appear fur- ther away than they actually are.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
92 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces:
1. Press the buttons L and R simultaneously (the remote control key must be at least in key position I).
2. Release them after approximately 1 second. The mirrors auto- matically stop in the fully retracted posi- tion.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended posi- tion.
Storing the position*
The mirror positions are stored in the key mem- ory when the car has been locked with the remote control key. When the car is unlocked with the same remote control key the mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the stored positions when the driver's door is opened.
The function can be activated/deactivated under Car Key memory Seat & mirror
positions. For a description of the menu sys- tem, see page 122.
Angling the door mirror when parking1
The door mirror can be angled down for the driver to view the side of the road when parking for example.
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R button.
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original position after about 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing the button labelled L or R respectively
Automatic angling of the door mirror
when parking1
When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is automatically angled down so that the driver can see the side of the road when parking for example. When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original posi- tion after a while.
The function can be activated/deactivated under Car settings Side mirror settings
Auto tilt left mirror or Auto tilt right
mirror. For a description of the menu system, see page 122.
Automatic retraction when locking
When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote control key the door mirrors are auto- matically retracted/extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated under Car settings Side mirror settings
Fold mirr. when locking. For a description of the menu system, see page 122.
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset electrically to the neutral position for electric retracting/ extending to work correctly:
1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R but- tons.
2. Fold them out again with the L and R but- tons.
3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Home safe and approach lighting
The light on the door mirrors illuminates when approach lighting or home safe lighting is selected, see page 83.
1 Only in combination with power seat with memory, see page 72.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
Use the defroster to quickly remove misting and ice from the rear window and the door mir- rors.
One press of the button starts the heating. The light in the button indicates that the function is active. Disconnect the heating as soon as the ice/misting is cleared in order not to load the battery unnecessarily. However, the heating is switched off automatically after a certain time. Following which, the heating is switched on and off automatically as long as the outside temperature is below +7 C.
The heating can be engaged automatically if the car is started in an outside temperature lower than +7 C. The automatic defrosting function must then be activated under Climate
settings Auto. rear defroster. For a description of the menu system, see page 122.
Interior rearview mirror
G 02
13 42
Control for dimming
Manual dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use dimming with the dimming control when lights from behind are distracting:
1. Use dimming by moving the control in towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal position by moving the control towards the windscreen.
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control is not available in mirrors with automatic dim- ming.
The compass* can only be specified for rear- view mirrors with automatic dimming, see page 94.
03 Your driving environment
Compass*
03
94 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Operation
Rearview mirror with compass.
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing. Eight different directions are shown with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
The compass is activated automatically when the car is started or in key position II, see page 69. To deactivate/activate the compass - press in the button on the rear side of the mirror using a paper clip for example.
Calibration
The compass may need calibrating to work correctly. C is shown in the mirror's display if the compass needs calibrating.
1. Stop the car in a large open area free from steel structures and high-voltage power lines.
2. Start the car.
NOTE
For optimum calibration - switch off all elec- trical equipment (climate control system, wipers etc.) and make sure that all doors are closed.
3. Press and hold the button on the rear of the rearview mirror (use a paper clip or similar) until C is shown again (approx. 6 seconds).
4. Drive off as usual. C disappears from the display when calibration is complete.
Alternative calibration method: Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 8 km/h until C disappears from the display when calibration is complete.
Selecting the zone
G 03
02 95
Magnetic zones.
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The correct zone must be selected for the com- pass to work correctly.
1. The remote control key should be in posi- tion II, see page 69.
2. Press and hold the button on the rear of the rearview mirror (use a paper clip or similar) for at least 3 seconds. The number for the current area is shown.
3. Press the button repeatedly until the num- ber for the required geographic area (115) is shown.
4. The display will revert to showing the com- pass direction after a few seconds.
03 Your driving environment
Power sunroof*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 95
General
The sunroof controls are located in the roof panel. The sunroof can be opened vertically at the rear edge and horizontally. Key position I or II is required for the sunroof to be opened.
Horizontal opening
G 02
13 43
Horizontal opening, backward/forward.
Opening, automatic
Opening, manual
Closing, manual
Closing, automatic
Opening
For maximum sunroof opening, move the con- trol back to the position for automatic opening and release.
Open manually by pulling the control back- wards to the point of resistance for manual opening. The sunroof moves to maximum open position as long as the button is kept depressed.
Closing
Close manually by pushing the control for- wards to the point of resistance for manual closing. The sunroof moves to closed position as long as the button is kept depressed.
WARNING
Risk of crushing when sunroof is closed. The sunroof's pinch-protection function only operates during automatic closing, not manual.
Close automatically by pressing the control to the position for automatic closing and then release it.
The power supply to the sunroof is switched off by removing the remote control key from the ignition switch.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Remember to always switch off the power supply to the sunroof by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.
Vertical opening
G 02
88 99
Vertical opening, raised at the rear edge.
Open by pressing the rear edge of the con- trol upward.
Close by pulling the rear edge of the con- trol down.
03 Your driving environment
Power sunroof*
03
96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Closing using the remote control key or
central locking button
G 02
13 45
One long press on the lock button closes the sunroof and all the windows, see pages 41 and 51 . The doors and the boot lid are locked. To interrupt closing, press the lock button again.
WARNING
If the sunroof is closed using the remote control key, check that no one is in danger of becoming trapped in any way.
Sunscreen
The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back auto- matically when the sunroof is opened. Grip the handle and slide the screen forward to close it.
Pinch protection
The sunroof's pinch protection function is trig- gered if it is blocked by an object during auto- matic closing. If blocked, the sunroof will stop and automatically open to the previous posi- tion.
Wind deflector
The sunroof has a wind deflector that is folded up when the sunroof is in the open position.
03 Your driving environment
Alcoguard*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97
General information on the Alcolock
The function of the Alcolock is to prevent the car from being driven by individuals under the influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be started the driver must take a breath test that verifies that he/she is not under the influence of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in accordance with each market's limit value in force for driving legally.
WARNING
The Alcolock is an aid and does not exempt the driver from responsibility. It is always the responsibility of the driver to be sober and to drive the car safely.
Functions
1. Nozzle for breath test. 2. Switch. 3. Transmission button. 4. Lamp for battery status. 5. Lamp for result of breath test. 6. Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
Operation
Battery
Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery sta- tus:
Lamp (4) Battery status
Green flashing Charging in pro- gress
Green Fully charged
Yellow Semi-charged
Red Discharged - fit the charger in the holder or connect the power supply cable from the glovebox.
NOTE
Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will keep the built-in battery fully charged and the Alcolock is activated automatically when the car is opened.
Before starting the engine
The Alcolock is activated automatically and is then ready for use when the car is opened.
1. When indicator lamp (6) is green the Alco- lock is ready for use.
2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If the Alcolock is outside the car when it is unlocked then it must first be activated with the switch (2).
3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath and blow with an even pressure until a "click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds. The result will be one of the alternatives in the following table Result after breath
test. 4. If no message is shown then the transmis-
sion to the car may have failed - in which case, press button (3) to transmit the result to the car manually.
5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolock in its holder.
6. Start the engine following an approved breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it must be repeated.
03 Your driving environment
Alcoguard*
03
98 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Result after breath test
Lamp (5) + Dis- play text
Specification
Green lamp + Alco-
guard Approved
test
Start the engine - no alcohol content measured.
Yellow lamp + Alco-
guard Approved
test
Engine starting pos- sible - measured alcohol content is above 0.1 promille but below the limit value in forceA.
Red lamp + Disap-
proved test Wait 1
minute
Engine starting not possible - measured alcohol content is above the limit value in forceA.
A Limits vary between countries, so find out what limits apply. See also the section entitled General information on the Alcolock on page 97
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the engine can be restarted within 30 minutes without a new breath test.
To bear in mind
Before the breath test
In order to obtain correct function and as accu- rate a measurement result as possible:
Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes before the breath test.
Avoid excess windscreen washing - the alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an incorrect measurement result.
Change of driver
In order to ensure that a new breath test is car- ried out in the event of a change of driver - depress the switch (2) and the send button (3) simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At which point the car returns to start inhibition mode and a new approved breath test is required before starting the engine.
Calibration and service
The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated at a workshop1 every 12 months.
30 days before recalibration is necessary the display shows Alcoguard Calibr. required. If calibration is not carried out within these 30 days then normal engine starting will be blocked - only starting with the Bypass func-
tion will then be possible, see page 99 sec- tion Emergency situation.
The message can be cleared by pressing the send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out on its own after approx. 2 minutes but then reap- pears each time the engine is started - only recalibration at a workshop1 can clear the mes- sage permanently.
Cold or hot weather
The colder the weather the longer it takes before the Alcolock is ready for use:
Temperature (C) Maximum heat- ing time (sec-
onds)
+10 +85 10
5 +10 60
40 5 180
At temperatures below -20 C or above +60 C the Alcolock requires additional power supply. The display shows Alcoguard insert
power cable. In which case, connect the power supply cable from the glovebox and wait until indicator lamp (6) is green.
1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
03 Your driving environment
Alcoguard*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 99
In extremely cold weather the heating time can be reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors.
Emergency situation
In the event of an emergency situation, or if the Alcolock is out of order or has been removed, it is possible to bypass the Alcolock in order to drive the car.
NOTE
All Bypass activation is logged and saved in memory, see page 10 in the section, Recording data.
After the Bypass function has been activated the display shows Alcoguard Bypass
enabled the whole time while driving and can only be reset by a workshop1.
The Bypass function can be tested without the error message being logged - in which case, carry out all the steps without starting the car. The error message is cleared when the car is locked.
When the Alcolock is installed, either the Bypass or Emergency function is selected as the bypassing option. This setting can be changed afterwards at a workshop1.
Activating the Bypass function
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk switch READ button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds - the display first shows Bypass activated Wait 1 minute and then Alcoguard Bypass enabled - after which the engine can be started.
This function can be activated several times. The error message shown during driving can only be cleared at a workshop1.
Activating the Emergency function
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk switch READ button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds - the display shows Alcoguard Bypass enabled and the engine can be started.
This function can be used once, after which a reset must be made at a workshop1.
Symbols and display messages
In addition to the previously described mes- sages, the combined instrument panel's dis- play can also show the following:
Display text Meaning/Action
Alcoguard Restart
possible
The engine has been switched off for less than 30 minutes - engine starting pos- sible without new test.
Alcoguard Service
required
Contact a work- shop1.
Alcoguard No sig-
nal
Transmission failed - send manually with button (3) or take a new breath test.
Alcoguard Invalid
test
Test failed - take a new breath test.
Alcoguard Blow
longer
Blowing too short - blow for longer.
Alcoguard Blow
softer
Blowing too hard - blow more gently.
1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
03 Your driving environment
Alcoguard*
03
100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Display text Meaning/Action
Alcoguard Blow
harder
Blowing too weak - blow harder.
Alcoguard wait
Preheating
Heating not finished - wait for text Alco-
guard Blow 5 sec-
onds.
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 101
Petrol and diesel engines
G 02
11 26
Ignition switch with inserted remote control key and START/STOP ENGINE button.
IMPORTANT
Do not press in the remote control key incor- rectly turned - Hold the end with the detach- able key blade, see page 43.
1. Fit the remote control key in the ignition switch - Gently press the key until it is drawn into the lock. Note that if the car is equipped with an alcolock then a breath test must first be approved before the engine can be started, see page 97.
2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed1. (For cars with automatic gearbox - Depress the brake pedal.)
3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button and then release it.
NOTE
For diesel-engined cars, there may be a slight delay before the engine can be started - Engine Preheating is displayed in the meantime.
The starter motor works until the engine has started, but for no longer than 10 seconds (die- sel up to 60 seconds).
If the engine does not start - try again by hold- ing in the START/STOP ENGINE button until the engine starts.
WARNING
Always remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when leaving the car - especially if there are children in the car. For information on how the key is removed from the ignition switch, see page 69.
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is so that the emissions system can reach normal operating tem- perature as quickly as possible, which min- imises exhaust emissions and protects the environment.
Keyless drive
Follow steps 23 for starting petrol and diesel engines. For more information on Keyless drive, see page 48.
NOTE
One precondition for starting the car is that one of the car's remote control keys with the keyless drive* function is located inside the passenger compartment or the cargo area.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key with the Keyless drive* function from the car while driving or during towing.
Stop the engine
To switch off the engine - Press START/STOP
ENGINE.
1 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the car.
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
03
102
If the car has an automatic gearbox and the gear selector is not in a position P or if the car is moving - Press twice or hold the button depressed until the engine stops.
Steering lock
The steering lock opens when the START/
STOP ENGINE button is depressed after the remote control key has been pressed into the ignition switch.
The steering lock is activated when the driver's door is opened after the engine has been switched off.
Key positions
For information on the remote control key's dif- ferent key positions, see page 69
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine Flexifuel
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 103
General information about starting with Flexifuel
The engine is started in the same way as in a petrol-engined car.
In the event of starting difficulties
If the engine does not start at the first start attempt:
Make further attempts to start with the START/STOP ENGINE button.
If the engine still does not start
The outside temperature is lower than +5 C:
1. Connect the engine block heater for at least 1 hour.
2. Make further attempts to start with the START/STOP ENGINE button.
IMPORTANT
If the engine does not start despite repeated start attempts, you are recommended to contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Engine block heater*
Electrical input to the engine block heater.
When the temperature is expected to be lower than 10 C and the car has been refuelled with bioethanol E85, an engine block heater should be used for about 2 hours to facilitate the quick starting of the engine.
The lower the temperature, the longer the time required with the engine block heater. At -20 C the heater should be used for approx. 3 hours.
Cars intended for E85 have an electric engine block heater*. Starting and driving with a pre- heated engine involves significantly lower emissions and reduced fuel consumption. For
this reason you should aim to use the engine block heater throughout the winter months.
WARNING
The engine block heater is powered by high voltage. Fault tracing and repair of an elec- tric engine block heater and its electrical connections must only be carried out by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE
Points to remember for carrying reserve fuel:
In the event of stalling due to an empty fuel tank, bioethanol E85 from a reserve fuel can may make the engine difficult to start in extreme cold. This is avoided by filling the reserve fuel can with 95 octane petrol.
For more information on Flexifuel's bioethanol E 85 fuel, see page 217 and 293.
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine Flexifuel
03
104
Fuel adaptation
If the fuel tank is filled with petrol after the car has been driven on bioethanol E85 (or vice versa) then the engine may run slightly unevenly for a time. For this reason it is impor- tant to allow the engine to accustom itself (adapt) to the new fuel mixture.
Adaptation takes place automatically when the car is driven for a short period at an even speed.
IMPORTANT
After the fuel mixture in the tank has been changed an adaptation should be made by driving at an even speed for about 15 minutes.
If the battery has been discharged or discon- nected then a slightly longer period of driving is required for the adaptation as the memory for the electronics has been cleared.
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine external battery
03
105
Jump starting
If the battery is flat then the car can be started with current from another battery.
The following points are recommended when using a donor battery in order to avoid the risk of an explosion:
1. Insert the remote control key in key posi- tion 0, see page 69.
2. Ensure that the donor battery is 12 volt.
3. If the donor battery is in another car, switch off the donor car's engine in the other car and ensure that the cars do not touch one another.
4. Connect the red jump lead to the positive terminal on the donor battery .
5. Open the clips on the front cover of the battery in your car and remove the cover, see page 265.
6. Connect the red jump lead to the battery's positive terminal .
7. Connect one end of the black jump lead to the donor battery's negative terminal .
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment.
8. Connect the other clamp to an earthing point, (right-hand engine mounting at the top, the outer screw head) . Check that the jump lead clamps are fixed securely so that there are no sparks during the starting procedure.
9. Start the engine of the "donor car". Let the engine run a few minutes at a speed slightly higher than idle (1500 rpm).
10. Start the engine of the car with the flat bat- tery. Do not touch the crocodile clips dur- ing the start procedure. There is a risk of sparks forming.
11. Remove the jump leads, first the black and then the red.
Make sure that none of the clamps on the black jump lead comes into contact with the battery's positive terminal or the clamp connected to the red jump lead.
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which can be generated if you connect a jump lead incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery explode. The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If the acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical attention immediately.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
106 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Manual gearbox
Gearshift pattern 5-speed gearbox.
Gearshift pattern 6-speed gearbox.
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change.
Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes.
Reverse gear inhibitor
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil- ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear during normal forward travel.
Start from neutral position N and only engage reverse gear R when the car is sta- tionary.
Automatic gearbox, Geartronic*
G 02
13 50
D: Automatic gear positions. M (+/): Manual gear positions.
The information display shows the position of the gear selector using the following indica- tions: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4 5 or 6, see page 63.
Gear positions
Parking position (P)
Select P when starting the engine or when the car is parked. The brake pedal must be depressed to disengage the gear selector from the P position.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P position is engaged. Activate the electric parking brake by pressing the button, see page 114.
IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when position P is selected.
Reverse (R)
The car must be stationary when position R is selected.
Neutral position (N)
No gear is engaged and the engine can be started. Apply the parking brake if the car is stationary with the gear selector in position N.
Drive (D)
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and down takes place automatically based on the level of acceleration and speed. The car must be stationary when the gear selector is moved to position D from position R.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
107
Geartronic Manual gear positions (+/-)
The driver can also change gear manually using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal is released.
Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving the lever to the side from position D to the end position at +/. The information display shifts the indication from D to one of the figures 1 6, which is equivalent to the gear that is engaged just then, see page 63.
Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) to change up a gear and release the lever, which returns to its rest position between + and .
or
Pull the lever back towards (minus) to change down a gear and release it.
The manual gearshift mode (+/) can be selected at any time while driving.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the driver allows the speed to decrease lower than a level suitable for the selected gear, in order to avoid jerking and stalling.
To return to automatic driving mode:
Move the lever to the side to the end posi- tion at D.
NOTE
f the gearbox has a Sport programme then the gearbox will only become manual after the lever has been moved forwards or back- wards in its (-+/) position. The information display then shifts the indication from S to show which of the gears 1-6 is engaged.
Geartronic - Sport mode (S)1
The Sport programme provides sportier cha- racteristics and allows higher engine speed for the gears. At the same time it responds more quickly to acceleration. During active driving, the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading to a delayed upshift.
Sport mode is obtained by moving the lever to the side from D position to the end position at +/. The information display shifts the indica- tion from D to S.
Sport mode can be selected at any time while driving.
Geartronic - Winter mode
It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads if 3rd gear is engaged manually.
1. Depress the brake pedal and move the gear lever from the D position to the end position at +/ - the instrument panel dis-
play shifts the indication from D to the fig- ure 1.
2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever forward towards + (plus) twice - the display shifts the indication from 1 to 3.
3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully.
The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car moves off with a lower engine speed and reduced engine power on the drive wheels.
Kick-down
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the way to the floor (beyond the position normally regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is immediately engaged. This is known as kick- down.
If the accelerator is released from the kick- down position, the gearbox automatically changes up.
Kick-down is used when maximum accelera- tion is needed, such as for overtaking.
Safety function
To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox control program has a protective downshift inhibitor which prevents the kick-down func- tion.
1 Only models D5 and T6.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
108
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick- down which would result in an engine speed high enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at high engine speed the original gear remains engaged.
When kick-down is activated the car can change one or more gears at a time depending on engine speed. The car changes up when the engine reaches its maximum speed in order to prevent damage to the engine.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor G
02 13
51
The gear selector can be moved forward and back freely between N and D. Other positions are locked with a latch that is released with the inhibitor button on the gear selector.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can be moved forwards or backwards between P, R, N and D.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
The automatic gearbox has special safety sys- tems:
Keylock
To remove the remote control key from the ignition switch, the gear selector must be in the P position. The remote control key is locked in all other positions.
Parking position (P)
Stationary car with engine running:
Keep your foot on the brake pedal when mov- ing the gear selector to another position.
Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking
position (P)
To be able to move the gear selector from P to other gear positions, the brake pedal must be depressed and the remote control key must be in position II, see page 69.
Shiftlock Neutral (N)
If the gear selector is in the N position and the car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked.
To be able to move the gear selector from N to other gear positions, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the remote control key must be in position II, see page 69.
Deactivating the automatic gear selector
inhibitor
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat battery, the gear selector must be moved from the P position so that the car can be moved.
Lift the rubber mat in the compartment behind the centre console and open the hatch.
Fully insert the key blade. Press the key blade down and hold (For information on the key blade, see page 43.)
Move the gear selector from the P position.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109
Automatic gearbox, Powershift*2
G 02
13 50
D: Automatic gear positions. M (+/): Manual gear positions.
Powershift is a six-stage automatic gearbox that has double mechanical clutch discs in contrast to a conventional automatic gearbox. A conventional automatic gearbox has a hydraulic torque converter that transfers power from the engine to the gearbox.
Powershift transmission operates in the same way and has similar controls and functions as
the Geartronic automatic transmission, descri- bed in the previous section.
HSA
The HSA (Hill Start Assist) function means that the pressure in the brake system remains for several seconds while the foot is moved from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal before setting off or reversing uphill.
The temporary braking effect releases after several seconds or when the driver acceler- ates.
To bear in mind
The transmission's double clutch has overload protection that is activated if it becomes too hot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with the accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for a long time.
Overheated transmission causes the car to shake and vibrate, and the warning symbol illu- minates and the information display shows a message. The transmission can also overheat
during slow driving in queues (10 km/h or slower) on an uphill gradient, or with a trailer hitched. The transmission cools down when the car is stationary, with foot brake depressed and the engine running at idling speed.
Overheating during slow driving in queues can be avoided by driving in stages: Stop the car and wait with your foot on the brake pedal until there is a moderate distance to the traffic ahead, drive forward a short distance, and then wait another moment with your foot on the brake pedal.
IMPORTANT
Use the foot brake to hold the car stationary on an uphill gradient - do not hold the car with the accelerator pedal. The gearbox could then overheat.
Text message and action
In some situations the display may show a message at the same time as a symbol is illu- minated.
2 Only 4-cyl. model 2.0, 2.0T, 2.0F.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
03
110
Symbol Display Driving characteristics Action
Transm. overheat brake to hold Difficulty in maintaining even speed at con- stant engine speed.
Transmission overheated. Keep the car stationary using the foot brake.A
Transm. overheat park safely Significant pulling in the car's traction. Transmission overheated. Park the car immediately in a safe manner.A
Transm. cooling let engine run No drive due to overheated gearbox. Transmission overheated. For fastest cool- ing: Run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position until the message clears.
A For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.
The table shows three steps with an increased degree of seriousness should the transmission become too hot. In parallel with the display text the driver is also advised that the car's elec- tronics are temporarily changing the driving characteristics. Follow the instructions on the information display where appropriate.
NOTE
The table's examples are no indication that the car is defective but instead show that a safety function has been activated inten- tionally to prevent damage to one of the car's components.
WARNING
If a warning symbol combined with the text Transm. overheat park safely is ignored then the heat in the gearbox may become so high that the power transmission between engine and gearbox is temporarily halted in order to prevent the clutch from malfunctioning - the car then loses drive and is stationary until gearbox temperature has cooled to an acceptable level.
For more possible display messages with their respective proposals for solutions concerning automatic transmission, see page 126.
A display text clears automatically after the action has been carried out or after one press on the indicator stalk READ button.
03 Your driving environment
All-wheel drive AWD*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 111
All Wheel Drive is always available
All Wheel Drive means that the car is driving all four wheels at the same time.
The power is automatically distributed between the front and rear wheels. An elec- tronically controlled clutch system distributes the power to the wheels that have the best grip on the current road surface. This provides the best traction and prevents wheel spin. Under normal driving conditions, the majority of power is transmitted to the front wheels.
All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in rain, snow and icy conditions.
03 Your driving environment
Foot brake
03
112
General
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If one brake circuit is damaged then this will mean that the brakes engage at a deeper level and harder pressure on the pedal is needed to produce the normal braking effect.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a brake servo.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine is running.
If the brake is used when the engine is switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and more force must be used to brake the car.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy load the brakes can be relieved by using engine braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used if the same gear is used downhill as up.
For more general information on heavy loads on the car, see page 289.
Anti-lock braking system
The car is equipped with ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) which prevents the wheels from locking during braking. This means the ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration
may be felt in the brake pedal when this is engaged and this is normal.
A short test of the ABS system is made auto- matically after the engine has been started when the driver releases the brake pedal. A further automatic test of the ABS system may be made when the car reaches 40 km/h. The test may be experienced as pulses in the brake pedal.
Emergency brake lights and automatic
hazard warning flashers
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert vehicles behind about sudden braking. The function means that the brake light flashes instead of - as in normal braking - shining with a constant glow.
Emergency brake lights are activated at speeds above 50 km/h if the ABS system is working and/or in the event of sudden braking. After the car's speed has been slowed below 10 km/h the brake light returns from flashing to the normal constant glow - while at the same time the hazard warning flashers are activated, and they flash until the driver changes engine speed with the accelerator pedal or they are deactivated with their button, see page 81.
Cleaning the brake discs
Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs may result in delayed brake function. This delay is minimised by cleaning the brake linings.
Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road sur- faces, prior to long-stay parking and after the car has been washed. Carry this out by braking gently during a short period while en route.
Emergency Brake Assistance
Emergency Brake Assistance EBA (Emergency Brake Assist) helps to increase brake force and so reduce braking distance. EBA detects the driver's braking style and increases brake force as necessary. The brake force can be rein- forced up to the level when the ABS system is engaged. The EBA function is interrupted when the pressure on the brake pedal is reduced.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal low- ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the brake pedal is released then all braking ceases.
03 Your driving environment
Foot brake
03
113
Symbols in the combined instrument
panel
Symbol Specification
Constant glow Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and check for the cause of the brake fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started There was a fault in the brake system's ABS function when the engine was last running.
WARNING
If and illuminate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake sys- tem.
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is nor- mal at this stage, drive carefully to the near- est workshop and have the brake system checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
03
114
Parking brake, electric
Function
A faint electric motor noise can be heard when the parking brake is being applied. The noise can also be heard during the automatic func- tion checking of the parking brake.
If the car is stationary when the parking brake is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. If it is applied when the car is moving then the normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts on all four wheels. Brake function changes over to the rear wheels when the car is almost sta- tionary.
Low battery voltage
If the battery voltage is too low then the parking brake can neither be released nor applied. Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too low, see page 105.
Applying the parking brake
Parking brake control.
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Press the control.
3. Release the foot brake pedal and make sure that the car is at a standstill position.
When parking the vehicle, always engage 1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the gear selector in position P (for automatic gearbox).
The symbol in the combined instru- ment panel flashes until the parking
brake is fully applied. When the symbol illumi- nates the parking brake is applied.
In an emergency the parking brake can be applied when the vehicle is moving by depress- ing the control. When the control is released or
the accelerator pedal is depressed the braking is interrupted.
NOTE
In the event of emergency braking at speeds above 10 km/h a signal sounds during the braking procedure.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked facing uphill; turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill, turn the wheels towards the kerb.
WARNING
Get into the habit of always applying the parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear, or in P if it has auto- matic transmission, is not sufficient to hold the car in all situation.
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
03
115
Disengaging the parking brake
Parking brake control.
Cars with manual gearbox
Releasing manually
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch.
2. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
3. Pull the control.
NOTE
The parking brake can also be released manually by depressing the clutch pedal instead of the brake pedal. Volvo recom- mends the use of the brake pedal.
Releasing automatically
1. Start the engine.
2. Ease up the clutch and depress the accel- erator.
Cars with automatic gearbox
Releasing manually
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch.
2. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
3. Pull the control.
Releasing automatically
1. Put the seatbelt on.
2. Start the engine.
3. Move the gear selector to position D or R and depress the accelerator.
NOTE
For safety reasons, the parking brake is only released automatically if the engine is run- ning and the driver is wearing a seatbelt. The parking brake is released immediately on cars with automatic gearbox when the accelerator pedal is depressed and the gear selector is in position D or R.
Heavy load uphill
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the car to roll backward when the parking brake is released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid this by depressing the control while driv-
ing off. Release the control when the engine achieves traction.
Cars with Keyless drive function
Release manually by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button, then depress the brake or clutch pedal and pull the control.
Symbols
Symbol Specification
Read the message on the infor- mation display
A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is applied. If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen. Read the mes- sage on the information display.
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
03
116
Messages
Park brake not fully released - A fault is pre- venting the parking brake from being released. Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended. A warning signal sounds if you pull away with this error mes- sage.
Parking brake not applied - A fault is pre- venting the parking brake from being applied. Try to apply and release. Visit a workshop if the message remains - a Volvo workshop is rec- ommended.
The message is also illuminated on cars with manual gearbox when the car is driven at low speed with the door open in order to alert the driver that the parking brake may have been unintentionally disengaged.
Parking brake Service required - A fault has arisen. Visit a workshop if the fault persists - a Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the car has to be parked before the fault has been rectified then the wheels must be turned as if parking on a hill and 1st gear engaged (manual gearbox) or the gear selector must be in position P (automatic gearbox).
Replacing the brake linings
The rear brake linings must be replaced at a workshop due to the design of the electric parking brake - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink *
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 117
General
HomeLink is a programmable remote control which can control up to three different devices (e.g. garage door, alarm system, outdoor light- ing and indoor lighting etc.) and in doing so replace their remote controls. HomeLink is supplied built into the left-hand sun visor.
The HomeLink panel consists of three pro- grammable buttons and one indicator lamp.
NOTE
HomeLink is designed not to work if the car is locked from the outside.
Save the original remote controls for future programming (e.g. when switching to another car).
Delete the button programming when the car is to be sold.
Metallic sun visors should not be used in cars fitted with HomeLink . This may have an adverse effect on its function.
Operation
When HomeLink is fully programmed it can be used in place of the separate original remote controls.
Depress the programmed button to activate the garage door, alarm system etc. The indi- cator lamp illuminates for the time that the but- ton is kept depressed.
NOTE
If the ignition is not activated, HomeLink will work for 30 minutes after the driver's door has been opened.
The original remote controls can of course be used in parallel with HomeLink .
WARNING
If HomeLink is used to operate a garage door or gate, ensure that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or gate while it is in motion.
Do not use the HomeLink remote control for any garage door that does not have safety stop and safety reverse. The garage door must react immediately when it detects that something is preventing its movement, and stop directly and reverse. A garage door without these characteristics could cause personal injury. For further information - contact the supplier via the Internet: www.homelink.com.
Programming for the first time
The first step erases the memory in HomeLink and must not be carried out when only one individual button is being reprogram- med.
1. Depress the two outer buttons and do not release until the indicator lamp starts to flash after approx. 20 seconds. The flash- ing indicates that HomeLink is set in "learn mode" and is ready to be pro- grammed.
2. Position the original remote control 5-30 cm from HomeLink . Monitor the indi- cator lamp.
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink *
03
118 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The particular distance that is required between the original remote control and HomeLink depends on the programming of the device in question. Perhaps several attempts will be required at different dis- tances. Maintain each position for approx. 15 seconds before trying a new one.
3. Depress the button for the original remote control and the button to be programmed on HomeLink simultaneously. Do not release the buttons until the indicator lamp has changed over from slow to rapid flash- ing. The rapid flashing indicates successful programming.
4. Test the programming by depressing the programmed button on HomeLink and watching the indicator lamp:
Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed, this indicates that the programming is complete. The garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed HomeLink button is depressed.
Glow not constant: The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc-
ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds and indicates that the device has a "roll- ing code". The garage door, gate or sim- ilar is not activated when the pro- grammed HomeLink button is depressed. Continue the programming in accordance with the following.
5. Locate the "programming button1" on the receiver for the garage door for example, normally located close to the antenna's bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi- culty in finding the button - consult the supplier's manual, or contact the supplier via the Internet: www.homelink.com.
6. Depress and release the "programming button". The button flashes for approx. 30 seconds and the next step must be carried out within this period.
7. Depress the programmed button on HomeLink , while the "programming but- ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for approx. 3 seconds and then release. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence up to 3 times to conclude the program- ming.
Programming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual button, proceed in accordance with the following:
1. Depress the required button on HomeLink and do not release until step 3 has been completed.
2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLink starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds, position the original remote control 5-30 cm from HomeLink . Monitor the indi- cator lamp.
The particular distance that is required between the original remote control and HomeLink depends on the programming of the device in question. Perhaps several attempts will be required at different dis- tances. Maintain each position for approx. 15 seconds before trying a new one.
3. Depress the button on the original remote control. The indicator lamp will start to flash. When the flashing has changed over from a slow to a rapid flashing - release both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates successful programming.
4. Test the programming by depressing the programmed button on HomeLink and watching the indicator lamp:
1 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink *
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 119
Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed, this indicates that the programming is complete. The garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed HomeLink button is depressed.
Glow not constant: The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc- ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds and indicates that the device has a "roll- ing code". The garage door, gate or sim- ilar is not activated when the pro- grammed HomeLink button is depressed. Continue the programming in accordance with the following.
5. Locate the "programming button2" on the receiver for the garage door for example, normally located close to the antenna's bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi- culty in finding the button - consult the supplier's manual, or contact the supplier via the Internet: www.homelink.com.
6. Depress and release the "programming button". The button flashes for approx. 30 seconds and the next step must be carried out within this period.
7. Depress the programmed button on HomeLink , while the "programming but- ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for approx. 3 seconds and then release. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence up to 3 times to conclude the program- ming.
Erasing programming
It is only possible to erase the programming for all the buttons on HomeLink , not for individual buttons.
Depress the two outer buttons and do not release until the indicator lamp starts to flash after approx. 20 seconds. > HomeLink is now set in so-called
"learn mode" and is ready to be pro- grammed once more, see page 117.
2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
120 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Menus and messages........................................................................... 122 Climate control...................................................................................... 129 Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*................................................... 137 Additional heater*.................................................................................. 140 Audio system........................................................................................ 141 RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen* ....................... 154 Trip computer........................................................................................ 159 DSTC Stability and traction control system....................................... 161 Adapting driving characteristics........................................................... 163 Cruise control*...................................................................................... 164 Adaptive cruise control*........................................................................ 166 Distance Alert*...................................................................................... 174 Collision Warning with Auto Brake*...................................................... 177 Driver Alert System DAC*................................................................... 183 Driver Alert System - LDW*................................................................... 186 Park assist syst*.................................................................................... 189 BLIS* Blind Spot Information System................................................ 192 Comfort inside the passenger compartment........................................ 196 Comfort inside the passenger compartment - Executive..................... 199 Bluetooth handsfree*............................................................................ 200 Built-in phone*...................................................................................... 205
COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
04
122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Operation
Some of the car's functions do not have sep- arate function keys, but instead can be adjusted/activated/deactivated via a menu system.
Navigation in the menus is carried out using some of the centre console buttons or with the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
Many functions are standard, some are optional. The range varies depending on mar- ket.
Centre console controls
Centre console with information display and con- trols for menus.
Numerical keypad 19
Navigation button scrolls and selects among menu options
MENU leads to the menu system
EXIT leads back one step in the menu structure. A long press leads out from the menu system.
ENTER selects menu options
Steering wheel keypad*
ENTER
EXIT
Navigation buttons up/down.
If the steering wheel keypad has ENTER and EXIT then these buttons, and the navigation buttons, have the same functions as the con- trols in the centre console.
Search paths
Current menu level is shown at the top right of the centre console display. Search paths to the menu system functions are described in this manual in the following form:
Car settings Lock settings
The following is an example of how a function can be accessed and adjusted using the centre console buttons:
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to the desired menu, e.g. Car
settings, with the navigation buttons and press ENTER - a submenu opens.
3. Scroll to Lock settings and press ENTER - a new submenu opens.
4. Scroll to Doors unlock and press ENTER - a submenu of selectable func- tions opens.
5. Choose between the options and press ENTER - a cross is marked in the option's empty box.
6. Exit the programming by backing out of the menus incrementally with short presses on EXIT or with one long press.
The navigation buttons can be used instead of ENTER and EXIT when navigating in the menu
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 123
hierarchy. The right-hand arrow is equal to ENTER and the left-hand arrow to EXIT.
The menu options are numbered and can also be selected directly with the numerical keypad (only 19).
Menu overview
The phone and audio sources each have sep- arate main menus. An audio source main menu (e.g. CD) can only be accessed when that par- ticular audio source is active, see page 142.
The following menu options are included in Main menu:
Car Key memory
Seat & mirror positions*
Car settings
Information
Light settings
Lock settings
Reduced guard1
Tyre pressure *
Side mirror settings *
Collision warning settings *
Parking camera settings *
Lane departure warning *
Steering force level *
Unit settings
Driver Alert on
Climate settings
Automatic blower adjust
Recirculation timer
Auto. rear defroster
Seat heating time limit.
Seat heating off during starting
Reset climate settings
Main menu AM
Audio settings
Sound stage
Equalizer front
Equalizer rear
Auto. volume control
Reset all audio settings
Main menu FM
FM settings
News
TP (Traffic information)
Radio text
PTY (Program type)
Advanced radio settings
Audio settings2
Main menu DAB * 3
Main menu CD
Random
Off
Folder4
Disc4
Single disc5
All discs 5
CD settings
Track information *
1 Available in certain models. 2 For submenus, see "Main menu AM/Audio settings". 3 See page 151 . 4 Only in systems that allow the playback of MP3 and WMA format audio files. 5 Only in systems with CD changer.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
04
124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
News
TP (Traffic information)
Audio settings 2
Main menu AUX
AUX input volume
Audio settings 2
Main menu USB
USB settings
Track information
News
TP (Traffic information)
Audio settings 2
Main menu iPod
iPod settings
News
TP (Traffic information)
Audio settings 2
Track information
Main menu, Bluetooth6
Call register
Last 10 missed calls
Last 10 received calls
Last 10 dialled calls
Phone book
Search
Copy fr. mobile phone
Bluetooth *
Change phone7
Connect phone8
Remove phone
Connect fr. mobile phone
Bluetooth info. for the car
Call options
Automatic answer
Voice mail number
Phone settings
Sounds and volume
Synchronise phone book
Main menu, Bluetooth9
Call register
Last 10 missed calls
Last 10 received calls
Last 10 dialled calls
Phone book
Search
Copy fr. mobile phone
Bluetooth *
Connect phone10
Remove phone
Connect fr. mobile phone
Bluetooth info. for the car
Call options
Automatic answer
2 For submenus, see "Main menu AM/Audio settings". 6 Applies to cars that do not have built-in phone. 7 Only shown if a phone is connected. 8 Only shown if no phone is connected. 9 Applies to cars with built-in phone and BluetoothTM handsfree. 10Only shown if no phone is connected.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
04
125
Voice mail number
Change phone
Car phone
Add phone
Added phones11
Phone settings
Sounds and volume
Synchronise phone book
Main menu, built-in phone
Call register
Last 10 missed calls
Last 10 received calls
Last 10 dialled calls
Erase list
Call duration
Phone book
Search
New contact
Copy all
Speed-dial
Erase SIM
Erase phone
Memory status
Messages
Read
Write new
Delete all messages
Message settings
Call options
Send my number
Call waiting
Automatic answer
Auto redial
Voice mail number
Diversions
Change phone9
Car phone
Add phone
Added phones11
Phone settings
Network selection
SIM security
Edit PIN code
Sounds and volume
IDIS
Reset Phone settings
11A maximum of 5 phones. 9 Applies to cars with built-in phone and BluetoothTM handsfree.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
04
126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Combined instrument panel
Information display and controls for menus.
READ access to message list and mes- sage confirmation.
Thumbwheel browse between menu options.
RESET reset the active function. Used in certain cases to select/activate a function, see the explanation under each respective function.
The menus shown on the information displays in the combined instrument panel are con- trolled with the left-hand stalk switch. The menus shown depend on key position, see page 69. If a message appears then this must
be acknowledged with READ for the menus to be shown.
Menu overview
Some of the following menu options require the function and hardware to be installed in the car.
To empty fuel tank
Average
Instantaneous
Average speed
DSTC
Current speed12
Tyre pressure Calibration *
Park heat timer 1/213*
Park vent timer 1/2*
Park timer mode*
Direct start Park heat*
Direct start Park el.heat*
Direct start Park vent*
Additional heat auto*
Rest heat start*
Message
Text message in the information display.
When a warning, information or indicator sym- bol illuminates, a corresponding message appears on the information display. An error message is stored in a memory list until the fault is rectified.
Press READ to acknowledge and browse between the messages.
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, the message must be read (press READ) before the previous activity can be resumed.
12Only certain markets. 13Can only be set when the engine is switched off.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
04
127
Message Specification
Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage. Volvo recom- mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Stop engineA Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage. Volvo recom- mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Service urgentA Volvo recommends that you engage an author- ised Volvo workshop to check the car immedi- ately.
Service
requiredA Volvo recommends that you engage an author- ised Volvo workshop to check the car as soon as possible.
See manualA Read the owner's man- ual.
Message Specification
Book time for
maintenance
Time to book regular service. Volvo recom- mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Time for regular
maintenance
Time for regular service. Volvo recommends that you contact an author- ised Volvo workshop. The timing is deter- mined by the number of kilometres driven, num- ber of months since the last service, engine run- ning time and oil grade.
Maintenance
overdue
If the service intervals are not followed then the warranty does not cover any damaged parts. Volvo recom- mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for service.
Message Specification
Transmission
oil Change nee-
ded
Volvo recommends that you engage an author- ised Volvo workshop to check the car as soon as possible.
Transmission
performance
low
The gearbox cannot handle full capacity. Drive carefully until the message clearsB.
If shown repeatedly: Volvo recommends that you contact an author- ised Volvo workshop.
Transmission
hot Reduce
speed
Drive more smoothly or stop the car in a safe manner. Disengage the gear and run the engine at idling speed until the message clearsB.
Transmission
hot Stop safely
Critical fault. Stop the car immediately in a safe manner. Volvo rec- ommends that you con- tact an authorised Volvo workshopB.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
04
128
Message Specification
Temporarily
OFFA A function has been temporarily switched off and is reset auto- matically while driving or after starting again.
Low battery
Power save
mode
The audio system is switched off to save energy. Charge the bat- tery.
A Part of message, shown together with information on where the problem has arisen.
B For more messages concerning automatic transmission, see page 109.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 129
General
Air conditioning
The car is equipped with Electronic Climate Control (ECC). The climate control system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment.
NOTE
The air conditioning system (AC) can be switched off, but to ensure the best possible climate comfort in the passenger compart- ment and to prevent the windows from mist- ing, it should always be on.
Actual temperature
The temperature you select corresponds to the physical experience with reference to factors such as air speed, humidity and solar radiation etc. in and around the car.
The system includes a sun sensor which detects on which side the sun is shining into the passenger compartment. This means that the temperature can differ between the right and left-hand air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on both sides.
Sensor location
The sun sensor is located on the top side of the dashboard.
The temperature sensor for the passenger compartment is located below the climate control panel.
The outside temperature sensor is located on the door mirror.
The humidity sensor* is located in the inte- rior rearview mirror.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.
Side windows and sunroof
To ensure that the air conditioning works opti- mally, the side windows, and sunroof if appro- priate, should be closed.
Misting windows
Remove misting on the insides of the windows by primarily using the defroster function.
To reduce the risk of misting, keep the win- dows clean and use window cleaner.
Vents in the parcel shelf
NOTE
To avoid misting, do not block the vents fur- thest back on the parcel shelf with clothing or other objects.
Temporary shut-off of the air
conditioning
When the engine requires full power, e.g. for full acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer, the air conditioning can be temporarily switched off. There may then be a temporary increase in temperature in the passenger compartment.
Condensation
In warm weather, condensation from the air conditioning may drip under the car. This is normal.
Ice and snow
Remove ice and snow from the climate control system air intake (the grille between the bonnet and the windscreen).
Fault tracing and repair
Engage a workshop that has authorisation for the fault tracing and repair of the climate con- trol system. Volvo recommends that you con- tact an authorised Volvo workshop.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Refrigerant
The climate control system contains the refrig- erant R134a, see page 291. This refrigerant contains no chlorine, which means that it is harmless to the ozone layer. Engage a work- shop that has authorisation for filling/changing refrigerant to carry out the work. Volvo recom- mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Total airing function
The function opens/closes all side windows simultaneously and can be used for example to quickly air the car during hot weather, see page 51.
Passenger compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compart- ment is cleaned with a filter. This must be replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the recommended replacement intervals. If the car is used in a severely contaminated environment, it may be necessary to replace the filter more often.
NOTE
There are different types of passenger com- partment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*
This option keeps the passenger compartment clear of allergy and asthma inducing sub- stances. For more information on CZIP, see the brochure included with the purchase of the car.
The following is included:
An enhanced fan function that means that the fan starts when the car is opened with the remote control key. The fan fills the passenger compartment with fresh air. The function starts when required and is dis- engaged automatically after a time or when one of the passenger compartment doors is opened. The amount of time the fan runs is reduced gradually due to reduced need up until the car is 4 years old.
The air quality system IAQS is a fully auto- matic system that cleans the air in the pas- senger compartment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone.
NOTE
In cars with CZIP the IAQS filter should be changed after 15 000 km or once per year depending on whichever occurs first. How- ever, up to 75 000 km over 5 years. In cars without CZIP the IAQS filter must be changed at the normal service.
Use of tested materials in the interior
equipment.
The materials have been developed in order to minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger compartment and they contribute to making the passenger compartment easier to keep clean. The carpets in both the passenger com- partment and the cargo area are removable and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo, see page 276.
Menu settings
It is possible to change the default settings for three of the climate control system's functions via the centre console, see page 122:
Fan speed in automatic mode, see page 133.
Recirculation timer for passenger com- partment air, see page 134.
Automatic rear window defrosting, see page 93.
All climate control system functions are set to original position with RESET via the display.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
131
Air distribution
G 02
13 66
The incoming air is divided between 20 different vents in the passenger compart- ment.
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO
mode.
If necessary it can be controlled manually, see page 136.
Air vents in the dashboard
G 02
13 67
Open
Closed
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the outer vents at the side windows to remove misting.
A certain air flow always comes from the vents in order to maintain a good climate in the pas- senger compartment.
Air vents in the door pillars
G 02
13 68
Closed
Open
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the vents at the windows to remove mist- ing.
Aim the vents into the passenger compartment to maintain a comfortable climate in the rear seat.
NOTE
Remember that small children may be sen- sitive to air flows and draughts.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC
Ventilated front seats*, left-hand side
Fan
Heated front seats, left-hand side
Air distribution
Heated front seats, right-hand side
AUTO
Ventilated front seats*, right-hand side
Temperature control, right-hand side
AC ON/OFF Air conditioning On/Off
Rear window and door mirror defrosters, see page 93.
Max. defroster
Recirculation/Air quality system
Temperature control, left-hand side
Operation
Ventilated front seats*
Ventilated front seats can only be specified when ECC is installed in the car. The venti- lation system consists of fans in the seats and backrests that draw air through the seat upholstery. The cooling effect
increases the cooler the passenger compart- ment air becomes.
The ventilation is regulated from the climate control and takes seat temperature, solar radi- ation and outside temperature into considera- tion.
The ventilation can be used at the same time as seat heating. For example, the function can be used to dry damp from clothing.
The ventilation system can be activated when the engine is running. There are three comfort levels that produce different cooling and dehu- midification outputs:
Comfort level III: press the button once for maximum output three lamps illuminate.
Comfort level II: press the button twice for lower output two lamps illuminate.
Comfort level I: press the button three times for the lowest output one lamp illu- minates.
Press the button four times to switch off the function no lamps illuminate.
NOTE
The seat ventilation should be used carefully by people sensitive to draughts. Comfort level I is recommended for long-term use.
IMPORTANT
The seat ventilation cannot be started when passenger compartment temperature is below 5 C. This is to avoid chilling anyone sitting in the seat.
Fan
Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed. If AUTO
is selected then fan speed is regulated automatically. The previously set fan speed is disengaged.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
133
NOTE
If the fan is fully disengaged the air condi- tioning is not engaged which may result in a risk of misting windows.
Heated seats
Front seats
Press the button once for the highest heat level three lamps illuminate.
Press the button twice for a lower heat level two lamps illuminate.
Press the button three times for the lowest heat level one lamp illuminates.
Press the button four times to switch off the heat no lamps illuminate.
The heating is normally switched off at start up. If the heating has been switched on then it is switched off automatically when the engine is switched off. Automatic start of heating can be activated/deactivated in the menu under: Climate settings Seat heating off during
starting
Seat heating is switched off automatically after a while. The function can be deactivated/acti- vated in the menu under: Climate settings
Seat heating time limit.
For a description of the menu system, see page 122.
WARNING
The heated seat should not be used by peo- ple who find it difficult to perceive tempera- ture increase because of sensory loss or for any reason have difficulty in managing to use the control of the heated seat. Other- wise, burn injuries may arise.
Rear seats1
G 02
13 76
Heat control takes place in the same way as for the front seat.
Air distribution
The figure consists of three buttons. When the buttons are pressed a lamp in front of the respective part of the fig- ure illuminates and shows which air distribution is selected, see page 136.
Auto
The function automatically regulates temperature, air conditioning, fan speed, recir- culation, and air distribution.
If you select one or more manual functions, the other functions continue to be controlled auto- matically. The air quality sensor is engaged and all manual settings are switched off when AUTO is pressed. The display shows AUTO
CLIMATE.
Fan speed in automatic mode can be set under Climate settings Automatic blower
adjust. Select between Low, Normal or High:
1 Not included if 2-stage booster cushion is selected.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
134
Low - Automatic fan control. Low airflow is prioritised.
Normal - Automatic fan control.
High - Automatic fan control. A more intense airflow is prioritised.
For a description of the menu system, see page 122.
Temperature control
The temperatures on the driver and passenger sides can be set independently.
When the car is started, the most recent setting is resumed.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher/lower temperature than the actual temperature required.
AC Air conditioning on/off
The air conditioning is con- trolled automatically by the system when the ON lamp is on. This way, incoming air is sufficiently cooled and dehu- midified.
When the OFF lamp is on, the air conditioning is always disengaged. Other functions are still controlled automatically. When defroster is selected, the air conditioning system is set for maximum dehumidification.
Defroster
Used to quickly remove mist- ing and ice from the wind- screen and side windows. Air flowing to the windows. The light in the defroster button illuminates when the function is active.
The following also takes place in order to pro- vide maximum dehumidification in the passen- ger compartment:
the air conditioning is automatically engaged
recirculation and the air quality system are automatically disengaged.
The air conditioning can be disengaged man- ually using the AC button. When the defroster function is switched off the climate control sys- tem returns to the previous settings.
Recirculation/Air quality system
Recirculation
When recirculation is engaged the right-hand orange light in the button illu- minates. The function is selected to shut out bad air, exhaust gases etc. from the passenger compartment. The
air in the passenger compartment is recircula- ted, i.e. no outside air is taken into the car when this function is activated.
NOTE
If the air in the car recirculates for too long, there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.
Timer
With the timer function activated the system will exit manually activated recirculation mode according to a time that depends on the out- side temperature. This reduces the risk of ice, misting and bad air. Activate/deactivate the function under Climate settings
Recirculation timer. For a description of the menu system, see page 122.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 135
NOTE
When Defroster is selected, recirculation is always deactivated.
Air quality system*
The air quality system sepa- rates gases and particles to reduce the levels of odours and pollution in the passenger compartment. If the outside air is contaminated then the air intake is closed and the air
is recirculated. When the AUTO button is depressed the air quality sensor is always engaged.
Activating recirculation/air quality
sensor
Switch between the three functions by pressing the but- ton repeatedly.
The left-hand orange lamp illuminates the air quality sensor is disengaged. There is no recirculation, only fresh air.
The centre green lamp illuminates recir- culation not engaged, providing it is not required for cooling in hot weather.
The right-hand orange lamp illuminates recirculation is engaged.
NOTE
The air quality sensor should always be engaged in order to obtain the best air in the passenger compartment.
Recirculation is limited in cold weather to avoid misting.
If the insides of the windows start misting up, disengage the air quality sensor, and the defroster functions for the windscreen, the side and the rear windows should also be used to demist the windows.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
04
136
Air distribution table
Air distribution Use Air distribution Use
Air to windows. Some air flows from the air vents. The air is not recirculated. Air conditioning is always engaged.
to remove ice and misting quickly.
Air to the floor and win- dows. Some air flows from the dashboard air vents.
to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in cold or humid weather.
Air to windscreen and side windows. Some air flows from the air vents.
to prevent misting and icing in a cold and humid climate, (not at too low fan speed to enable this).
Air to floor and from dash- board air vents.
in sunny weather with cool outside tempera- tures.
Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents.
to ensure good comfort in warm, dry weather.
Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and windows.
to direct heat or cold to the floor
Airflow to the head and chest from the dashboard air vents.
to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.
Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor.
to provide cooler air along the floor or warmer air higher up in cold weather or hot, dry weather.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 137
Fuel-driven heater
General information about the parking
heater
The parking heater heats the engine and pas- senger compartment and can be started directly or with the timer.
Two different times can be selected using the timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car is heated and ready. The car's electronic sys- tem calculates when heating should be started based on the outside temperature.
The heater cannot start if the outside tempera- ture exceeds 15 C. At -5 C or lower the maxi- mum running time of the parking heater is 50 minutes.
WARNING
The car must be outdoors when the parking heater is used.
NOTE
When the parking heater is active there may be smoke from the right-hand wheel hous- ing, which is perfectly normal.
Refuelling
Warning decal on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out can be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel.
Check the information display to see that the parking heater is switched off. When it is running, the information display shows Park heat ON.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.
Battery and fuel
If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel level is too low, the parking heater is switched off automatically and a message appears on the information display. Acknowledge the mes- sage by pressing once on the indicator stalk READ button, see page 138.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the parking heater com- bined with short journeys may discharge the battery and impair starting.
The car should be driven for the same time as the heater is used to ensure that the car's battery is recharged adequately to replace the energy consumed by the heater when it is used on a regular basis.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
04
138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Operation
READ button
Thumbwheel
RESET button
For more information on the information dis- play and READ, see page 126.
Symbols and display messages
When one of the timer's settings or Direct start is activated, the infor-
mation symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates while the information display shows an explanatory text and a further illumi- nated symbol. The table shows symbols and display texts that appear.
Sym- bol
Display Specification
G 02 51 02
Fuel
heater
ON
The heater is switched on and running.
G 02 51 02
Timer is
set for
Fuel
heater
The heater's timer is activated after the remote control key has been removed from the ignition switch and leaving the car - the engine and passenger com- partment are heated at the set time.
G 02 51 02
Heater
stopped
Low bat-
tery
The heater has been stopped by the car's electron- ics in order to facil- itate starting the engine.
Sym- bol
Display Specification
G 02 51 02
Heater
unavail.
Low fuel
level
Setting the heater is not possible due to fuel level being too low (approx. 7 litres) - this is in order to facilitate starting the engine as well as approx. 50 km driving.
G 02 51 02
Park
heater
Service
required
Heater not work- ing. Contact a workshop for repair. Volvo rec- ommends that you contact an author- ised Volvo work- shop.
A display text clears automatically after a time or after one press on the indicator stalk READ button.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 139
Direct start and immediate stop
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Direct start
Park heat.
2. Press RESET to select between ON and OFF.
ON: Parking heater switched on manually or with programmed timer.
OFF: Parking heater switched off.
With the direct start of the heater it will be acti- vated for 50 minutes.
Heating of the passenger compartment will begin as soon as the engine coolant has reached the correct temperature.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven while the parking heater is running.
Setting the timer
The time when the car shall be used and heated is specified with the timer.
Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2.
NOTE
The timer can only be programmed when the remote control key is in key position I, see page 69 - programming must therefore be carried out before starting the engine.
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Park heat
timer 1.
2. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash- ing hours setting.
3. Select the required hour using the thumb- wheel.
4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash- ing minutes setting.
5. Select the required minute using the thumbwheel.
6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting.
7. Press RESET to activate the timer.
After setting Park heat timer 1 a second start time can be programmed with Park heat timer
2 by scrolling to it with the thumbwheel.
Set the alternative time in the same way as Park heat timer 1.
Deactivating a timer-started heater
A timer-started heater can be switched off manually before the set time has elapsed. Pro- ceed as follows:
1. Press READ.
2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text Park heat timer 1 or 2. > The text ON flashes on the display.
3. Press RESET. > The text OFF is shown with a constant
glow and the heater is switched OFF.
A timer-started heater can be switched off in accordance with the instructions in the section "Direct start and immediate stop", see page 139.
Clock/timer
The heater's time is connected to the car's clock.
NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if the car's clock is reset.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Additional heater*
04
140 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information about the additional heater
In cold climate zones1 an additional heater may be required to obtain the correct operating temperature in the engine and to obtain suffi- cient heating in the passenger compartment.
Fuel-driven additional heater
A fuel-driven additional heater is fitted in cars with diesel engines.
The heater starts automatically when extra heat is required when the engine is running.
The heater is switched off automatically when the correct temperature is reached or when the engine is switched off.
NOTE
When the additional heater is active there may be smoke from the right-hand wheel housing which is perfectly normal.
Auto mode or shutdown
The additional heater can be switched off for short distances if required.
READ button
Thumbwheel
RESET button
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional
heat auto.
2. Press RESET to select between ON and OFF.
NOTE
The menu options are only visible in key position I - any adjustments must therefore be made before starting the engine.
Passenger compartment heater*
If the additional heater is supplemented with timer function then it can be used as a fuel- driven passenger compartment heater, see page 137.
Electric additional heater
Cars with certain petrol engines2 have an elec- tric additional heater integrated into the car's climate control system.
In a semi-cold1 climate zone diesel-driven cars have an electric additional heater instead of a fuel-driven version.
The heater cannot be controlled manually but is instead activated automatically after the engine has been started in outside tempera- tures below 14 C and is switched off after the set passenger compartment temperature has been reached.
1 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned. 2 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the engines concerned.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 141
General
The audio system can be equipped with differ- ent options and is one of the following three basic versions:
Performance
High Performance
Premium Sound
The system version is shown in the display when the audio system is started.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the Dolby symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby Surround Pro Logic II System is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Remote control key and key positions
The audio system can be used without the remote control key in the ignition switch for 15 minutes at a time.
NOTE
Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch if the audio system is used when the engine is switched off. This is to avoid discharging the battery unnecessar- ily.
If the audio system is active when the engine is switched off then it is activated automatically next time the engine is started.
Overview
Input for external audio source; AUX and USB* (e.g. iPod 1)
Steering wheel keypad
Centre console control panel
Control panel with headphones socket*
Steering wheel keypad*
Confirm selection in menu system, accept phone call.
Lead up in menu system. Interrupt current function, end/refuse phone calls, clear entered characters.
Volume
A short press scrolls between CD tracks or preset radio stations. A long press fast- winds CD tracks or seeks the next availa- ble radio station.
1 The iPod trademark belongs to Apple Computer Inc.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
142 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Rear control panel with headphones socket*
Headphones with an impedance of 16-32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higher are recommended for best sound reproduc- tion.
VOLUME Volume, left and right.
Scroll/search forward and backward.
MODE - Select between AM, FM, CD, AUX, USB*(e.g. iPod ), DAB1/DAB2* and On/Off. For connection via AUX or USB, see page 144.
Headphones sockets (3.5 mm).
Activating/deactivating
The control panel is activated with MODE. Deactivation is possible via a long press on MODE or when the engine is switched off.
Scroll/search forward and backward
Short presses on (2) are used to scroll between CD tracks or preset radio stations. A long press fast-winds CD tracks or seeks the next availa- ble radio station.
Limitations
The audio source (FM, AM, CD etc.) played back in the speakers cannot be controlled from the rear control panel.
Audio functions
Centre console, controls for audio functions.
AM, FM and CD, internal audio sources
MODE - Scroll between external audio sources (AUX, USB* and DAB1/DAB2*). For connection via AUX or USB, see page 144.
SOUND - Pushbutton and knob controls for adjusting the sound pattern
Navigation button
VOLUME - Volume and On/Off
Audio volume and automatic volume
control
The audio system compensates for disrupting noises in the passenger compartment by increasing the volume with the speed of the
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 143
car. The level of compensation can be set at low, medium or high. Select the level under Audio settings Auto. volume control.
External audio source audio volume
The AUX input can be used for connecting an MP3 player which has no USB connection for example, see page 144.
NOTE
The audio quality may be impaired if the player is charged while the audio system is in AUX mode. In which case, avoid charging the player via the 12 V socket.
The audio source connected to the AUX input may have a different volume to the internal audio sources. Correct this by adjusting the input volume of the AUX input:
1. Set the audio system in AUX mode using the MODE button, press MENU and navi- gate with (4) to AUX input volume, see page 141.
2. Turn the SOUND control or press / the navigation button, see page 141.
Audio controls
Press the control SOUND repeatedly to browse among the following listed options.
Adjustment is made by turning the control.
NOTE
Press MENU to access the audio settings. For more information, see page 122.
Bass - Bass level.
Treble - Treble level.
Fader Balance between the front and rear speakers.
Balance Balance between the left and right-hand speakers.
Subwoofer* - Bass speaker level. Turning the control anticlockwise to Min deac- tivates the Subwoofer.
Surround* Surround settings.
Under Surround 3 channel stereo or Dolby Surround Pro Logic II can be activated by selecting 3-ch or Dpl2 respectively. This ena- bles the following options:
Centre level* Level for centre speaker.
Surround level* Level for surround.
Equalizer
The equalizer2 can be used to adjust different frequency bands separately.
1. Go to Audio settings and select Equalizer front or Equalizer rear.
The sound level for the wavelength is adjusted with / on the navigation button. Press / to select another wavelength.
2. Use ENTER to save or EXIT to close.
Sound stage
The sound experience can be optimised for the driver's seat*, both front seats or the rear seat. Select one of the options under Audio settings Sound stage.
Optimum sound reproduction
The audio system is calibrated for optimum sound reproduction by means of digital signal processing.
This calibration takes into account loudspeak- ers, amplifiers, passenger compartment acoustics, listener position etc. for each com- bination of car model and audio system.
There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes into account the position of the volume control, radio reception and vehicle speed.
2 Only High Performance and Premium Sound.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
144 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The controls explained in these operating instructions, e.g. Bass, Treble and Equalizer, are only intended for the user to be able to adapt the sound reproduction accord- ing to personal taste.
AUX, USB3 and external audio source
General
An external audio source can be connected to the car's infotainment system via the USB connec- tion* or AUX input in the centre console.
The AUX input enables the connection of an external audio source, e.g. an iPod or MP3 player. Read more on page 143
If you choose to connect an iPod , MP3 player or a USB memory stick to the USB connec-
tion* then you can control the audio source using the car's audio controls.
Select the connection using the MODE button:
1. If USB is selected then Connect device is shown in the display.
2. Connect your iPod , MP3 player or USB memory stick to the USB connection* in the centre console's storage compartment (see preceding illustration).
The text Loading is shown in the display when the system is loading the storage media's file structure. This may take some time.
Once loading is complete, track information is shown on the display and the desired track can be selected.
A track can be selected in three ways:
With the TUNING control, , see page 141.
the navigation control's (4) right or left- hand button or, , see page 141.
the steering wheel keypad (see page 141).
In USB or iPod mode the audio system oper- ates in an equivalent way to the CD player for playing back music files. For more information, see page 146.
NOTE
The system supports the playback of music files in the MP3, WMA and WAV file formats. However, there are variants of these file for- mats that are not supported by the system. The system also supports most iPod mod- els produced in 2005 or later. iPod Shuffle is not supported.
USB connection* and RSE *
If the car is equipped with RSE* then the USB connection* is located in accordance with the above illustration.
3 Only High Performance and Premium Sound.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 145
Audio sources
USB memory
To facilitate the use of a USB memory stick, only store music files on it. It takes a lot longer for the system to load storage media that con- tains anything other than compatible music files.
NOTE
The system supports removable media which is compatible with USB 2.0 and the FAT32 file system, and can handle a maxi- mum of 500 folders and 64 000 files. The memory must have a capacity of at least 256 Mb.
NOTE
When using a longer model USB memory stick the use of the enclosed USB adapter cable is recommended. This is to avoid mechanical wear to the USB input and the connected USB memory stick.
MP3 player
Many MP3 players have their own file systems that are not supported by the audio system. For use in the system, an MP3 player must be set in USB Removable device/Mass Storage
Device mode.
iPod
An iPod is charged and supplied with power by the USB connection* via the player's con- nection cable. However, if the player's battery is fully discharged then it must be charged before being connected.
NOTE
When an iPod is used as audio source, the car's infotainment system has a menu structure that is similar to the iPod player's own menu structure.
For information on USB and iPod in combi- nation with Performance audio, see the acces- sory manual for USB andiPod Music Interface.
CD functions
Centre console, controls for CD functions.
CD eject
CD insert and eject slot
Navigation button for changing CD tracks
Fast-wind and change CD track
CD changer position selection*
Scan CD
Start playback (CD player)
If a music CD is in the player when CD is pressed then playback is started automatically. Otherwise, insert a disc and press CD.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
146 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Start playback (CD changer*)
Start CD playback by pressing the CD button. If a music CD is in the player when this takes place then playback is started automatically. Otherwise, insert a disc and press CD.
Insert a CD (CD changer*)
1. Select an empty position with the number buttons 16 or / on the navigation button (4).
An empty position is marked on the dis- play. The text Insert disc shows that a new disc can be inserted. The CD changer can hold up to six CDs.
2. Insert a CD in the CD changer slot.
Disc eject
A CD will stay in the ejected position for approx. 12 seconds. Following which it is re- inserted in the player and playback continues.
Eject individual discs by pressing the eject but- ton.
Eject all discs with a long press on the eject button. The entire magazine is emptied disc by disc.
Pause
If the volume is turned down completely, the CD player is stopped. The player is restarted when volume is increased.
Audio files4
The CD player also supports MP3 and WMA format audio files.
NOTE
Some copy protected audio files may not be read by the player.
When a CD with audio files is inserted into the player the disc's file structure is loaded. Depending on the quality of the disc and the quantity of information there may be a delay before playback starts.
Navigation and playback
If a disc containing audio files is inside the CD player then ENTER leads to the disc's direc- tory structure. The directory structure is navi- gated in the same way as the audio system's menu structure. Audio files have the symbol
and directories have the symbol . Start audio file playback with ENTER.
When the playback of a file is finished the play- back of the other files in the same directory
continues. Directory change takes place auto- matically when all files in the current directory have been played back.
Fast-wind/change CD tracks and audio
files
Short presses / on the navigation but- ton are used to scroll between CD tracks/audio files. Long presses are used to fast-wind CD tracks/audio files. The steering wheel keypad can also be used for this purpose. Track change can also be made by turning TUNING.
Scan CD
This function plays the first ten seconds of each CD track/audio file. Press SCAN to acti- vate. Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continue playback of the current CD track/audio file.
Random
This function plays the tracks in random order. The random CD tracks/audio files can be scrol- led through in the normal way.
NOTE
It is only possible to scroll between random CD tracks on the current disc.
4 High Performance and Premium Sound.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
147
Different messages appear depending on which random function has been selected:
RANDOM means that the tracks from only one music CD are played
RND ALL means that all tracks on all music CDs in the CD changer are played.
RANDOM FOLDER means that the audio files in a directory on the current CD are played.
CD player
If a normal music CD is being played, activate/ deactivate under Random.
If a disc with audio files is being played, acti- vate/deactivate under Random Folder.
CD changer
If a normal music CD is being played under Random Single disc or Random All
discs. The option All discs only applies to the music CDs in the changer.
If a CD with audio files is being played, activate/ deactivate instead under Random Folder. If you select another CD the function is deac- tivated.
Track information
If track information is stored on a music CD then it can be shown on the display. This also applies to MP3 and WMA files for Premium Sound and High Performance. Activate/deac-
tivate in CD mode under CD settings Track
information.
Radio functions
Centre console, controls for radio functions.
Navigation button for tuning, automatic
Cancel function in progress
Tuning, manual
Scan wavelength
Preset storage, automatic
Preset buttons and preset storage, manual
Select wavelength AM and FM (FM1 and FM2)
Tuning, automatic
1. Select wavelength using FM or AM.
2. Press / on the navigation button.
Tuning, manual
1. Select wavelength using FM or AM.
2. Turn TUNING.
Preset
10 station presets can be stored per wave- length. FM has 2 memories for presets: FM1
and FM2. The stored presets are selected using the preset buttons.
Preset storage can be carried out manually or automatically.
Preset storage, manual
1. Tune into a station.
2. Hold in a station preset button until the message Channel stored appears on the display.
Preset storage, automatic
The function is especially useful in areas where the radio stations and their frequencies are unfamiliar. The 10 strongest radio stations are stored automatically in a separate memory.
1. Select wavelength using FM or AM.
2. Hold in AUTO until Autostoring appears on the display.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
148
Once Autostoring disappears from the dis- play, the stations are stored. The radio contin- ues in Auto mode and Auto appears on the display. The automatically stored presets can now be selected using the preset buttons. Automatic preset storage can be cancelled using EXIT.
Auto mode is cancelled by pressing for exam- ple AUTO or FM.
Returning to Auto mode provides access to the autostored presets:
1. Press AUTO. > Auto appears on the display.
2. Press a preset button.
Scan wavelength
The function automatically searches the cur- rent wavelength for strong stations. When a station is found, it is played for approx. 8 sec- onds before scanning is resumed.
1. Select wavelength using AM or FM.
2. Press SCAN.
SCAN appears on the display. Close using SCAN or EXIT.
RDS functions
RDS (Radio Data System) links FM transmitters into a network. An FM transmitter in such a
network sends information that gives an RDS radio the following functions:
Automatically switches to a stronger trans- mitter if reception in the area is poor.
Searches for programme type, such as traffic information or news.
Receives text information on current radio programme.
NOTE
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only some if its functionality.
If a required programme type is located the radio can switch stations interrupting the audio source currently in use. For example, if the CD player is in use, it is paused. The interrupting transmission is played at a preset volume, see page 150. The radio returns to the previous audio source and volume when the set pro- gramme type is no longer broadcast.
The programme functions alarm (ALARM!), traffic information (TP (Traffic information)), news (News), and programme types (PTY
(Program type)) interrupt one another in order of priority, where alarm has the highest priority and programme types has the lowest. For fur- ther programme interruption settings (EON
and Regional), see page 149. Press EXIT to return to the interrupted audio source.
Alarm
This function is used to warn of serious acci- dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The message ALARM! appears on the display when an alarm message is transmitted.
Traffic information TP
This function allows traffic information sent within a set station's RDS network to break through. The TP (Traffic information) symbol indicates that the function is activated. If the set station can send traffic information then
appears on the display.
Activate/deactivate under FM settings
TP (Traffic information).
TP from current station/all stations
The radio can interrupt with traffic information from only the set (current) station or from all stations.
Go to FM settings Advanced radio
settings TP Station... to change.
News
This function allows news broadcasts sent within a set station's RDS network to break through. The NEWS symbol indicates that the function is active.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
149
Activate/deactivate under FM settings
News.
News from current/all stations
The radio can interrupt with news from only the set (current) station or from all stations.
Go to FM settings Advanced radio
settings News station to change.
Programme types PTY
The PTY function can be used to select differ- ent programme types, such as pop music and serious classic. The PTY symbol indicates that the function is active. This function allows pro- gramme types broadcast within a set station's RDS network to break through.
1. Activate in FM mode by selecting a pro- gramme type under FM settings PTY
Select PTY.
2. Deactivate by clearing the PTY under FM
settings Clear all PTY.
PTY search
This function searches the entire wavelength for the selected programme type.
1. Select a PTY under FM settings PTY
Select PTY.
2. Go to FM settings
PTY (Program type) Search PTY.
If the radio finds any of the selected pro- gramme types, >| To seek appears on the dis- play.
To continue searching for another broad- cast of the selected programme types, press on the navigation button.
Display of programme type
The programme type of the current station can be shown on the display.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
settings PTY Show PTY
NOTE
Not all radio stations support display of pro- gramme type.
Radio text
Some RDS stations transmit information on programme content, artists, etc. This informa- tion can be shown on the display.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under Radio text.
Automatic frequency update AF
This function selects one of the strongest transmitters for a set station. The function may need to search through the entire FM wave- length to find a strong transmitter. If this occurs, the radio mutes and PI Seek Press
Exit to cancel appears on the display.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
settings Advanced radio settings
AF.
Regional radio programmes REG
This function causes the radio to continue with a regional transmitter even if its signal strength is low. The symbol REG shows that the func- tion is active.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM
settings Advanced radio settings
Regional.
Enhanced Other Networks EON
This function is useful in urban areas with many regional radio stations. It allows the distance between the car and the radio station trans- mitter to determine when programme functions should interrupt the current audio source.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode by select- ing one of the options under FM settings
Advanced radio settings EON:
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
150
Local interrupts only if the radio station transmitter is close.
Distant5 interrupts if the station trans- mitter is far away, even if there is a lot of static.
Off no interruption for programmes from other transmitters.
Resetting RDS functions
All radio settings can be reset to the original factory settings.
The reset is carried out in FM mode under FM settings Advanced radio settings
Reset all.
Volume control, programme types
The interrupting programme types, e.g. NEWS or TP, are heard at the volume selected for each respective programme type. If the vol- ume level is adjusted during the programme interruption, the new level is saved until the next programme interruption.
Menu structure FM
Main menu FM
FM settings
1.1 News
1.2 TP (Traffic information)
1.3 Radio text
1.4 PTY (Program type)
1.4.1 Select PTY
Clear all PTY
Current affairs
Information
Sport
Education
Drama
Culture
Science
Varied speech
Pop music
Rock music
Easy listening
Light classic
Classical
Other music
Weather & metro
Finance
Children's programs
Social affairs
Religion
Phone in
Travel & touring
Leisure & hobby
Jazz music
Country music
National music
Oldies music
Folk music
Documentary
1.4.2 Search PTY
1.4.3 Show PTY text
1.5 Advanced radio settings
1.5.1 TP station
1.5.2 News station
5 Factory settings.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151
1.5.3 AF
1.5.4 EON
Off
Local
Distant
1.5.5 Regional
1.5.6 Reset all FM settings
Radio system - DAB*
General
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is a digital broadcasting system for radio.
NOTE
This system does not support DAB+.
Service and Ensemble
Service - Channel, radio channel (only audio services are supported by the sys- tem).
Ensemble - A collection of radio channels on the same frequency.
Storing channel groups (Ensemble learn)
When the vehicle is moved to a new broad- casting area, programming of existing channel groups in the area can take place.
Programming of channel groups creates an updated list of all available channel groups. The list is not updated automatically. Program- ming takes place via the Ensemble learn
menu or directly by means of a long press on AUTO. If can take up to a minute to program a channel group if both Band III and LBand are selected.
Wavelength
DAB is transmitted on two wavelengths6; Band
III and LBand.
Band III over the whole country7
LBand - mainly in large cities
By selecting for example Band III on its own, channel programming takes place more quickly than if both Band III and LBand are selected. It is not certain that all channel groups will be found. Wavelength selection does not affect the stored memories.
Navigation via lists
There are three types of basic list which can be used for navigation:
Ensemble - Shows channel groups that the receiver has obtained via channel group programming.
Service - Shows channels irrespective of the channel group to which they are allo- cated. The list can also be filtered using DAB PTY (see below).
Subchannel - Subchannels to a selected channel.
The lists can be accessed via the menu. The channel groups can also be accessed by pressing ENTER.
Scanning
Scanning means that all channels in the list are played for 10 seconds each.
Press SCAN to activate
Scanning can also be selected in DAB-PTY mode. In which case only channels of the pre- selected programme type are played.
Stop scanning by pressing SCAN once, or by pressing EXIT.
Subchannel
Secondary components are usually named subchannels. These are temporary and can contain e.g. translations of the main pro- gramme into other languages.
6 Not all areas/countries use both wavelengths. 7 During a build-up phase DAB will not cover the whole country but will only work in larger urban areas.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
152
If one or more subchannels are broadcast then the > symbol is shown to the right of the chan- nel name in the display. A subchannel is indi- cated by the > symbol appearing to the left of the channel name in the display.
To access a subchannel:
Press .
To navigate between subchannels:
Press or .
Subchannels can only be accessed on the selected main channel and not on any other one without selecting it.
DAB PTY (program type)
DAB PTY selects one type of radio pro- gramme. There are 29 different programme types which also include different programme categories. After selecting a programme type, navigation only takes place within the channels broadcasting that type.
Exit this mode as follows:
Press EXIT
It is also possible to select a preset channel or exit DAB PTY via the menu. In certain cases DAB radio will exit PTY mode when DAB to DAB linking (see below) is implemented.
DAB to DAB link
It is possible to exit a channel with poor or no reception to the same channel in another chan- nel group with better reception. There may be a certain delay when changing channel group. There may be a period of silence between the current channel no longer being available to the new channel becoming available.
DAB display settings
1. Basic - Only the channel name is shown if a primary component is being played. A subchannel name is shown if it is a sub- channel being played
2. Ensemble - Adds the channel group name to the channel name
3. Ensemble +PTY - Adds the programme type name under the channel name
Preset
10 station presets can be stored per wave- length. DAB has 2 memories for presets: DAB1 and DAB2. The stored presets are selected using the preset buttons.
A preset contains one channel but no sub- channels. If a subchannel is being played and a preset is saved then only the channel ID is registered. This is because subchannels are temporary. At the next attempt to retrieve the preset, the channel which contained the sub-
channel will be played. The preset is not dependent on the channel list.
A saved channel does not have to be in the channel list for it to be playable. If the channel is loaded when it is not available then a preset number is shown and there is silence until an available preset is selected for loading. Alter- natively another channel.
NOTE
The audio system's DAB system does not support all functions available in the DAB standard.
Menu structure DAB
Main menu DAB
1. Select ensemble
2. Select service
3. Select subchannel
4. DAB PTY
4.1. DAB PTY off
4.2. News
4.3. Current affairs
4.4. Information
4.5. Sport
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Audio system
04
153
4.6. Education
4.7. Drama
4.8. Arts
4.9. Science
4.10. Talk
4.11. Pop music
4.12. Rock music
4.13. Calm music
4.14. Light classic
4.15. Classical music
4.16. Other music
4.17. Weather
4.18. Finance
4.19. Children
4.20. Factual
4.21. Religion
4.22. Phone in
4.23. Travel
4.24. Leisure
4.25. Jazz and blues
4.26. Country music
4.27. National music
4.28. Oldies music
4.29. Folk music
4.30. Documentary
5. Ensemble learn
6. DAB settings
6.1. DAB display settings
6.1.1. Ensemble name
6.1.2. Ensemble name and PTY
6.1.3. Basic
6.2. DAB to DAB link
6.3. FM traffic
6.4. Select DAB band
6.4.1. Band III
6.4.2. LBand
6.4.3. LBand & Band III
6.5. Reset DAB
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen*
04
154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
The RSE system can be used at the same time as the car's infotainment system.
When the rear seat passengers are using DVD, RSE-AUX or watching TV1 while listening with headphones, the driver and front seat passen- ger can still use the car's radio or CD player.
Power consumption, ignition positions
The system can be activated in ignition position I or II and while the engine is running. When the car is being started the film stops temporarily and continues when the engine has started.
When the system has been used once without the ignition in position I it is blocked. To restart, ignition position I must be activated.
NOTE
In the event of extended use (more than 10 minutes) with the engine switched off - the capacity of the car's battery may decrease to such a low level that the engine cannot be started.
In which case a message will appear on the screen.
TV overview
Press and select TV I DVD I AUX
TV MEDIA MENU.
Channel lock list
Channel manage-
ment
Channel search Management of
new carriers
Add carrier
Information on fre-
quency
Delete a frequency
Delete all frequen-
cies
Auto scan
System settings TV
Audio mode
Factory default
Time zone setting
CI module No CAM inserted
CI module infor-
mation
Signal strength
System settings TV
Press MEDIA MENU System settings
TV.
Languages
TV menu language
E.g. English
Pict. format 16:9
4:3
Auto
1 TV is an option for the RSE system.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 155
Mode (screen mode)
Standard
Zoom
Full screen
Centered
Audio mode Right
Left
Banner timeout
The menus can be displayed for between 8-40 seconds.
System settings-Sound mode
Press MEDIA MENU System settings
Audio mode.
The original speech for a TV programme can be replaced with speech in another language if the programme is broadcast with several audio tracks.
Audio Audio - 1, e.g. ENG.
Audio - 2, e.g. GER.
Audio mode Right
Left
Stereo
AC3
System settings-Factory settings
Press MEDIA MENU System settings
Factory default.
The system's factory settings are restored here.
System settings-Time zone settings
Press MEDIA MENU System settings
Time zone setting.
For local programme times to be displayed correctly the time zone must be set. The GUIDE and INFO button menus and the clock are affected by local time zones.
Pay channels
To watch pay channels a payment card must be fitted in an adapter which is inserted into the digital TV box.
G 03
15 09
The box is located behind the left-hand hatch in the cargo area
1. Open the hatch in the cargo area, it is secured with Velcro straps. > The digital TV box is revealed.
2. Open the rubber cover on the box.
3. Fit the payment card into the adapter. Make sure that it is fitted correctly.
4. Insert the adapter in the digital TV box. Make sure that it is inserted correctly. > The system will detect that it has
received new information.
5. Search to watch the new channels that have become available, see the section "Payment card TV channels" below.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen*
04
156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Payment card TV channels
Search so that the system identifies the pay- ment card's channels.
1. Press MEDIA MENU on the remote con- trol.
2. Select Channel search Auto scan.
3. Select country and press .
Formats supported by the digital TV box
The TV system supports MPEG-2 transmis- sions. There is the option to receive MPEG-4 transmissions if you buy an adapter. This adapter is inserted into the digital TV box and is fitted in the same way as the adapter for the payment card. See the section "Pay chan- nels" above.
Music
Playing back a CD disc
1. Insert the CD with the label side turned from the buttons. > The disc starts to play back automati-
cally.
2. Switch on the wireless headphones, select CH A for left-hand screen or CH B for right- hand screen.
> The sound is directed to the head- phones.
3. Adjust the audio volume in the headphones using the volume control/wheel on the headphones.
Alternatively - activate the car's audio sys-
tem in MODE-AUX and press A B on the remote control to listen via the speak- ers.
Selecting within a disc directory
1. Load the disc.
2. Press .
3. Scroll using the navigation buttons to select a file.
4. Press to select the subdirectory.
Different playback options
The disc can be played back in different ways, scroll with the navigation buttons to select playback option.
When the dialogue box appears:
1. Press the right-hand navigation button to move over in the right-hand menu.
2. Scroll using the navigation buttons to select playback options.
3. Confirm with .
Change CD track
Change CD track with or fast-wind by holding the buttons depressed.
Pause
1. Pause and restart the disc with .
2. Stop the disc with .
3. Press again to eject the disc.
Discs copied privately can be used.
However, playback and quality depend on the quality of the source file, format and disc qual- ity.
AUX input, Electrical socket 12 V
The input allows you to connect other equip- ment. Always follow the instructions included with the external equipment, or from the man- ufacturer or reseller, when connecting. Equip- ment connected via the RSE AUX input can use the screens, wireless headphones, head- phones sockets and the car's speakers.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157
Connecting the RSE AUX input
G 03
03 82
The RSE-AUX input is located under the front arm- rest.
1. Connect the video cable to the yellow socket.
2. Connect the left-hand audio cable to the white socket and the right-hand one to the red socket.
3. Connect the power cable to the power socket if your equipment is designed for 12 V.
For electrical socket location, see page 198
System
Formats supported by the system.
Audio format
CD-DA, DVD Audio Playback, MP3, WMA
Video format
DVD video, VCD, SVCD, DivX/ MPEG-4, WMA video, Photo CD Kodak, Photo CD JPG
Disc format
DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, DVD-RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, CD-R, CD-ROM, CD-RW, CD-3, HDCD
Advanced system settings
These settings can only be accessed when the DVD player is empty.
Press MEDIA MENU.
GENERAL SETUP ANGLE MARK
CAPTION
AUDIO SETUP COMPRESSION
DVX(R)
REGISTRATION
PREFERENCES TV TYPE
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
DEFAULTS
Changing the battery in the remote control and wireless headphones
The remote control and headphones are pow- ered by 2 AAA batteries.
Take along extra batteries for a long journey.
1. Unscrew the screw and detach the battery cover.
2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new batteries in accordance with the symbols in the battery compartment and insert them.
3. Fit the cover and screw in the screw.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen*
04
158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Wireless headphones
1. Unscrew the screw and detach the battery cover.
2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new batteries in accordance with the symbols in the battery compartment and insert them.
3. Fit the cover and screw in the screw.
NOTE
If the system is too hot to be used or if bat- tery voltage is too low then an information message appears on the screen.
Environmental care
Be sure to dispose of the exhausted batteries in an environmentally safe manner.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159
General
Information display and controls.
READ - confirms
Thumbwheel browse between menus and options in the trip computer list
RESET resets
The trip computer's menu is in a variable loop. One of the menu options is a blank display - it also marks the beginning/end of the loop.
Functions
NOTE
If a warning message appears when the trip computer is used then the message must first be acknowledged before the trip com- puter can be reactivated. Acknowledge the warning message by pressing READ.
To change unit for distance and speed - con- tact a workshop. An authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended.
Average speed
Average speed is calculated from the last resetting. Reset using RESET.
Instantaneous
Current fuel consumption is calculated every second. The information on the display is updated every couple of seconds. When the car is stationary, "----" appears on the display.
Average
Average fuel consumption is calculated from the last resetting. Reset using RESET.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven supplementary and/or parking heater* has been used.
Km to empty tank
The calculation is based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km and the remaining driveable fuel quantity. The display shows the approximate distance that can be driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the tank.
An economic driving style generally results in a longer driving distance. For more information on how you can influence fuel consumption, see page 11.
No guaranteed range remains when the display shows "---- km to empty tank". Refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if the driving style has been changed.
Resetting
1. Select --- km/h average speed or --.- l/ 100km average.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
04
160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
2. Press and hold RESET for approx. 1 second to reset the selected function. If RESET is kept depressed for at least 3 three seconds then Average speed and Average are reset simultaneously.
Current speed*1
The instrument panel display shows current speed in mph if the speedometer is graduated in km/h. If the speedometer is graduated in mph then the current speed is shown in km/h.
1 Only certain markets.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
DSTC Stability and traction control system
04
161
General information on DSTC
The stability and traction control system, DSTC (Dynamic Stability and Traction Control) helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction.
The activation of the system during braking may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The car may accelerate slower than expected when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
Active Yaw Control
The function limits the driving and brake force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car.
Spin Control
The function prevents the driving wheels from spinning against the road surface during accel- eration.
Traction control system
The function is active at low speed and trans- fers power from the driving wheel that is spin- ning to the one that is not.
Operation
Reduced operation
System operation during skidding and accel- eration can be reduced. Operation during skid- ding is delayed and so allows more skidding which provides greater freedom for dynamic driving. Traction in deep snow or sand is improved as traction is no longer limited.
G 02
14 09
1. Turn the thumbwheel (1) until the DSTC
menu is shown. DSTC ON means that the system function is unchanged.
DSTC spin control OFF means that sys- tem operation is reduced.
2. Press and hold RESET (2) until the DSTC
menu is changed.
The system will remain reduced until the engine is switched off - after the engine is started the next time DSTC is back in its normal mode again.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics may dete- riorate if the function is reduced.
Messages in the information display
DSTC Temporarily OFF means that the sys- tem has been temporarily reduced due to excessive temperature in the brake discs.
The function is reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.
DSTC Service required system disabled due to a fault.
Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine. > If the message remains when the engine
is restarted, drive to a workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.
Symbols in the combined instrument
panel
If the symbols and are shown at the same time - read the message on the infor- mation display.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
DSTC Stability and traction control system
04
162
If the symbol appears alone then it may appear as follows:
Flashing light means that the system is now being activated.
Constant glow for 2 seconds means sys- tem check when the engine is started.
Constant glow after starting the engine or while driving means system fault.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adapting driving characteristics
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163
Active chassis (Four-C)*
Active chassis, Four-C (Continously Controlled Chassis Concept), regulates the characteris- tics of the shock absorbers so that the car's driving characteristics can be adjusted. There are three settings: Comfort, Sport and Advanced.
Comfort
This setting means that the car is perceived as being more comfortable on rough and uneven road surfaces. Shock absorption is soft and the movement of the body is smooth and gentle.
Sport
This setting means that the car is perceived as being more sporty and is recommended for more active driving. Steering response is faster than in the Comfort mode. Shock absorption is harder and the body follows the road in order to reduce rolling during cornering.
Advanced
This setting is only recommended on very even and smooth road surfaces.
The shock absorbers are optimised for maxi- mum roadholding and rolling in bends is further minimised.
Operation
Chassis settings.
Use the buttons in the centre console to change setting. The setting in use when the engine is switched off is activated next time the engine is started.
Speed related power steering*
Steering force increases with the speed of the car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. The steering is firmer and more immediate on motorways. Steering is light and requires no extra effort when parking and at low speed.
The driver can choose between three different levels of steering force for road responsiveness or steering sensitivity. Go to Car settings
Steering force level in the menu system and select Low, Medium or High.
For a description of the menu system, see page 123. This menu cannot be accessed while the car is in motion.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Cruise control*
04
164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Operation
G 02
14 11
Steering wheel keypad and display.
Cruise control - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.
Standby mode
Activate and adjust the speed.
Selected speed (in brackets = Standby mode)
Activating and setting the speed
Switch on the cruise control with one press on the steering wheel button CRUISE - the sym- bol is illuminated in the display (5) and the brackets around (---) km/h show that the cruise control is set in standby mode.
The cruise control is then activated with or , after which the current speed is stored in
the memory - the display text (---) km/h
changes to show the selected speed, e.g. 100
km/h.
NOTE
Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 30 km/h.
Changing the speed
In active mode the speed is adjusted with long or short presses on or - the last press is stored in the memory.
A temporary increase in speed with the accel- erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the cruise control setting - the car returns to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
NOTE
If any cruise control button is held depressed for more than approx. 1 minute then cruise control is disengaged. The engine must be switched off in order to reset cruise control.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
Press to temporarily disengage the cruise control and set it in standby mode - set speed is shown in brackets in the display (5), e.g. (100) km/h.
Automatic standby mode
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set in standby mode if:
wheels lose traction
the foot brake is used
speed falls below approx. 30 km/h
the clutch pedal is depressed
the gear selector is moved to neutral posi- tion (automatic gearbox)
the driver maintains a speed higher than the set speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then regulate the speed.
Resume set speed
Cruise control in standby mode is re-activated with one press on the steering wheel button
- the speed is then set to the last stored speed.
NOTE
A significant increase in speed may arise after the speed has been resumed with .
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Cruise control*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165
Deactivate
The cruise control is switched off with the steering wheel button CRUISE or by switching off the engine - the set speed is deleted from the memory and cannot be resumed with the
button.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
04
166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on ACC
The adaptive cruise control ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. It provides a more relaxing driving experience on long jour- neys on motorways and long straight main roads in smooth traffic flows.
The driver sets the desired speed and time interval to the car in front. When the radar detector detects a slower vehicle in front of the car, the speed is automatically adapted to that. When the road is clear again the car returns to the selected speed.
If the adaptive cruise control is switched off or set to the standby mode and the car comes too close to a vehicle in front, then the driver is warned by Distance Alert (see page 174) about the short distance.
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable dis- tance.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic, weather and road conditions.
The Function section and onwards informs about limitations of which the driver should be aware before using the adaptive cruise control.
The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when the adaptive cruise control is being used.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control components must only be performed at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Function
G 02
14 12
Functions overview.
Warning lamp, braking by driver required
Steering wheel keypad
Radar sensor
Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise control system and a coordinated spacing sys- tem.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver must inter- vene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehi- cles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/ snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads.
The distance to the vehicle ahead is mainly measured by a radar sensor. Cruise control regulates the speed with acceleration and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being used by cruise con- trol.
WARNING
The brake pedal moves when the cruise control brakes. Do not rest your foot under the brake pedal as it could become trapped.
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval
set by the driver. If the radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the cruise control's set speed. This also happens if the speed of the vehicle in front exceeds the cruise control's set speed.
The cruise control aims to control the speed in a smooth way. In situations that require rapid braking the driver must brake himself/herself. This applies with large differences in speed, or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily. Due to lim- itations in the radar sensor, braking may come unexpectedly or not at all, see page 170.
The adaptive cruise control can be activated to follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h up to 200 km/h. If the speed falls below 30 km/h or if the engine speed becomes too low, the cruise control is set in standby mode at which automatic braking ceases - the driver must then take over himself/herself to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead.
Warning lamp - braking by driver
required
Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity that is equivalent to approximately 25% of the car's braking capacity.
If the car needs to be braked more heavily than cruise control capacity and the driver does not brake, then the cruise control uses the collision warning system's warning lamp and warning
sound (see page 177) to alert the driver that immediate intervention is required.
NOTE
The warning lamp may be difficult to notice in strong sunlight or when sunglasses are being worn.
WARNING
Cruise control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor. Consequently there may be no warning or it may be sub- ject to a delay. Do not wait for a warning but brake when it is necessary.
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfaces. The cruise control may have dif- ficultly in keeping the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep roads, with a heavy load or with a trailer - in which case, be extra attentive and ready to slow down.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
04
168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Operation
Steering wheel keypad and display.
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.
Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Activate and adjust the speed.
Selected speed (in brackets = Standby mode)
Time interval - On, during adjustment.
Time interval - On, after adjustment.
Activating and setting the speed
Switch on cruise control with one press on the steering wheel button - the symbol is illuminated in the display. The brackets (6) at
(---) mean that cruise control is set in standby mode.
The cruise control is then activated with or , after which the current speed is stored in
the memory - the display text (---) changes to show the selected speed, e.g. 100 without brackets.
When the symbol changes to the radar sensor has detected a vehicle.
Only when the symbol (with car) is illuminated, is the distance to the vehicle in front
regulated by the cruise control.
NOTE
Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 30 km/h.
Changing the speed
In active mode the speed is adjusted with long or short presses on , or . In active mode the button has the same function as
but results in a lower increase in speed. The last press is stored in the memory.
NOTE
If any cruise control button is held depressed for more than approx. 1 minute then cruise control is disengaged. The engine must be switched off in order to reset cruise control.
In certain situations, cruise control cannot be activated. Then the display shows Cruise control Unavailable, see page 172.
Set time interval
Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the display as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time distance. One line corre- sponds to approximately
1 second, 5 lines approximately 2.5 seconds.
The time interval is increased using the steering wheel button and decreased using .
At low speed, when the distances are short, the adaptive cruise control increases the time interval slightly.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time interval to vary noticeably in certain situations in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front smoothly and comfortably.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169
Note that a short time interval gives the driver a short time to react and act if something unex- pected happens in the traffic.
The number of lines for the selected time interval is shown during the setting itself and for several seconds after- wards. Then a smaller scale version of the symbol is shown to the right of the dis-
play. The same symbol is also shown when Distance Alert is activated, see page 174.
NOTE
Only use the time interval that is allowed in accordance with local traffic regulations.
If cruise control does not seem to react to activation the reason may be that the time interval to the closest vehicle prevents an increase in speed.
The higher the speed, the longer the calcu- lated distance in metres for a specific time interval.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
Press the steering wheel button to tempo- rarily disengage the cruise control and set it in standby mode - set speed is shown in brackets in the display, e.g. (100).
Standby mode due to driver intervention
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set in standby mode if:
the foot brake is used
the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than 1 minute1
the gear selector is moved to neutral posi- tion (automatic gearbox)
the driver maintains a speed higher than the set speed for longer than 1 minute
The driver must then regulate the speed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accel- erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the cruise control setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic standby mode
The adaptive cruise control is dependent on other systems, such as Stability and traction control (DSTC). If any of these systems stop working then cruise control is automatically deactivated.
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will sound and the message Cruise control
Cancelled is shown in the display. The driver must then intervene and adapt the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.
An automatic deactivation can be due to:
engine speed is too low/high
speed falls below 30 km/h
wheels lose traction
brake temperature is high
the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).
Resume set speed
Cruise control in standby mode is re-activated with one press on the steering wheel button
- the speed is then set to the last stored speed.
NOTE
A significant increase in speed may arise after the speed has been resumed with .
Deactivate
The cruise control is switched off with the steering wheel button in standby mode or with one long press in active mode. The set speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with the button.
1 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
04
170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The radar sensor and its limitations
Apart from the adaptive cruise control, the radar sensor is also used by the Collision Warning with Auto Brake function (see page 177) and the Distance Alert function (see page 174). The function of the radar sensor is to detect cars or larger vehicles in the same direction, in the same lane.
Modification of the radar sensor could result in it being illegal to use.
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable dis- tance.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic, weather and road conditions.
The Function section and onwards informs about limitations of which the driver should be aware before using the adaptive cruise control.
The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when the adaptive cruise control is being used.
WARNING
Accessories or other objects such as auxil- iary lamps must not be installed in front of the grille.
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver must inter- vene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehi- cles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/ snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads.
The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehi- cles in front is reduced significantly:
if the radar sensor becomes blocked and cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy rain or slush, or if other objects have col- lected in front of the radar sensor.
NOTE
Keep the surface in front of the radar sensor clean.
if the speed of vehicles in front is signifi- cantly different from your own speed.
Examples where the cruise control does
not work optimally
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In some situations another vehicle is not detected, or the detection is made later than expected.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171
G 02
14 14
The ACC cannot see small vehicles (Dark triangle: ACC field of vision).
Sometimes the radar sensor cannot detect vehicles at close distances, e.g. a vehicle that drives in between the car and vehicles in front.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane can remain undetected.
In bends the radar sensor may detect the wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from view.
Fault tracing and action
If the display shows the message Radar
blocked See manual this means that the radar signals from the radar sensor are blocked and that vehicles in front of the car could not be detected.
In turn this means that the Adaptive Cruise Control, Distance Alert and Collision Warning with Auto Brake functions are not operating either.
The following table presents possible causes for a message being shown along with the appropriate action.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
04
172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Cause Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.
Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar sig- nals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy road surface.
The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer blocked.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol Message Specification
Standby mode or active mode without detected vehicle.
Active mode with detected vehicle to which cruise control adapts the speed.
Time interval activated, during adjustment.
Time interval activated, after adjustment.
Turn on DSTC to enable
Cruise
Cruise control cannot be activated until the stability and traction control function (DSTC) has been set in Normal mode.
Cruise control Cancelled The cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adaptive cruise control*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173
Symbol Message Specification
Cruise control Unavailable Cruise control cannot be activated.
This could be due to:
brake temperature is high
the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.
Radar blocked See manual Cruise control temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event that heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 170.
Cruise control Service
required
Cruise control not working.
Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Distance Alert*
04
174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
Distance Alert is a function that informs the driver about the time interval to vehicles in front.
Distance alert is active at speeds above 30 km/h and only reacts to vehicles driving in front of the car, in the same direction. No dis- tance information is provided for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles.
G 01 73 62
A small section of the red warning lamp in the windscreen illuminates with a constant glow if the distance to the vehicle in front is shorter than the set time interval.
NOTE
Distance Alert is deactivated during the time that Adaptive Cruise Control is active.
WARNING
Distance Alert only reacts if the distance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset value - the speed of the driver's vehicle is not affected.
Operation
Press the button in the centre console to switch the function on or off. The function is switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
Set time interval
Controls and display.
Time interval - Increase/decrease
Time interval - On, during adjustment
Time interval - On, after adjustment
Time intervals are increased using and decreased using .
Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the display as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time distance. One line corre- sponds to approximately
1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines approx- imately 2.5 seconds.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Distance Alert*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175
The number of lines for the selected time interval is shown during the setting itself and for several seconds after- wards. Then a smaller scale version of the symbol is shown to the right of the dis-
play. The same symbol is also shown when adaptive cruise control is activated.
NOTE
The higher the speed, the longer the calcu- lated distance in metres for a specific time interval.
The set time interval is also used by the adaptive cruise control function, see page 168.
Only use the time interval that is allowed in accordance with local traffic regulations.
Limitations
The function uses the same radar sensor as adaptive cruise control and the collision warn- ing system. For more information on the radar sensor and its limitations, see page 170.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia- tions in light intensity, as well as wearing sunglasses, could mean that the warning light in the windscreen cannot be seen.
Poor weather or winding roads could affect the radar sensor's capacity to detect vehi- cles in front.
The size of other vehicles could also affect detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This could mean that the warning lamp illumi- nates at a shorter distance than the setting or that the warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can also cause the lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than that set due to limitations in sensor range.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol Message Specification
Set time interval, during adjustment.
Set time interval, after adjustment.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Distance Alert*
04
176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbol Message Specification
Radar blocked.
See manual
Distance Alert temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event that heavy rain or slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 170.
Collision warn. Service
required
Distance Alert and Collision Warning with Auto Brake are fully or partially disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177
General
Collision Warning with Auto Brake (Collision Warning with Auto Brake) is designed to assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a vehicle in front that is stationary or driving in the same direction.
The collision warning system has the following three functions.
Collision Warning Warns the driver of a potentially imminent collision.
Brake Support Assists the driver to brake effectively in a critical situation.
Auto Brake Brakes the car automatically when a collision is unavoidable. The Auto Brake function cannot prevent a collision but instead aims to reduce collision speed.
The collision warning system is activated in sit- uations where the driver should have started braking a lot earlier, which is why the function cannot help the driver in every situation.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention.
The collision warning system must not be used as an excuse for the driver to change his/her driving style. If the driver solely relies on Colli- sion Warning with Auto Brake to do the brak- ing, there will be a collision sooner or later.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of collision warning system components must only be performed at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
WARNING
The collision warning system does not work in all driving situations and traffic, weather and road conditions. The collision warning system does not react to vehicles driving in another direction to the car or to people and animals.
Warning only activated in the event of a high risk for collision. The Function section and the section after advise about limitations of which the driver should be aware before using Collision Warning with Auto Brake.
The Auto Brake function can only reduce the collision speed. The driver must depress the brake pedal to achieve full brake function.
Never wait for a collision warning. When driving you are responsible for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when the collision warning system is used.
Function
G 01 73 82
Functions overview.
Visual warning signal in the event of a col- lision risk
Radar sensor
Camera sensor
Collision warning
Together with a camera sensor, the radar sen- sor detects stationary vehicles as well as vehi- cles driving in the same direction in front of the car.
In the event of there being a risk of collision with such a vehicle your attention is drawn with a red flashing warning lamp and a warning sound.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
04
178 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Brake support
If the risk of collision still increases after the collision warning then the brake support is acti- vated. The brake support prepares the brake system for rapid braking and the brakes are applied gently, which may be noticed as a slight jerk.
If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently quickly then full brake function is implemented, even with light pedal force.
Auto Brake
If the driver has not yet started an evasive manoeuvre in this situation and the risk of a collision is imminent then the Auto Brake func- tion comes into effect, without the driver need- ing to touch the brake pedal. Braking then takes place with limited brake force in order to reduce collision speed. The driver has to brake in order to achieve full brake force.
Operation
Settings are made from the centre console dis- play via a menu system. For information on how the menu system is used, see page 122.
NOTE
The Brake Support and Auto Brake func- tions are always enabled - they cannot be deactivated.
On and Off
To select whether the collision warning system should be switched on or off: In the menu Car
settings Collision warning settings
choose between the options On or Off.
When starting the engine, the setting that was selected when the engine was switched off is obtained automatically.
Activating/deactivating warning signals
The warning lamp is activated automatically when the engine is started if the system is switched on.
The warning sound can be activated/deacti- vated separately using the options for On or Off in the menu system under Car settings
Collision warning settings Warning
sound.
Set warning distance
The warning distance regulates the distance at which the visual and acoustic warnings are deployed. Select one of the options from Long, Normal or Short in the menu system
under Car settings Collision warning
settings Warning distance.
The warning distance determines the system's sensitivity. Warning distance Long provides an earlier warning. First test with Long and if this setting produces too many warnings, which could be perceived as irritating in certain sit- uations, then change to warning distance Normal.
Only use warning distance Short in excep- tional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.
NOTE
When the adaptive cruise control is in use the warning lamp and warning sound will be used by the cruise control even if the colli- sion warning system is switched off.
The collision warning system warns the driver in the event of a risk of a collision, but the function cannot shorten driver reaction time.
In order for the collision warning system to be effective, always drive with the Distance Alert set at time interval 4 5. see page 174.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179
NOTE
Even if the warning distance has been set to Long then in certain situations warnings could be perceived as being late. E.g. in the event of large differences in speed or if vehi- cles in front brake heavily.
Checking settings
The settings required can be controlled on the centre console display. Access via the menu for Car settings Collision warning
settings, see page 123.
Limitations
The collision warning system is active from and including approx. 7 km/h.
The visual warning signal may be difficult to notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflec- tions, when sunglasses are being worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead. The warn- ing sound should therefore always be acti- vated.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the capacity to avoid a collision. In such situations the ABS and DSTC systems will provide best possible braking force with maintained stability.
NOTE
The visual warning signal can be temporarily disengaged in the event of high passenger compartment temperature caused by strong sunlight for example. If this occurs then the warning sound is activated even if it is deactivated in the menu system.
Warnings may not appear if the dis- tance to the vehicle in front is small or if steering wheel and pedal movements are large, e.g. a very active driving style.
WARNING
Warnings and brake interventions could be implemented late or not at all if the traffic situation or external influences mean that the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a vehicle in front correctly.
The sensor system has a limited range for stationary or slow vehicles so the system provides less effective warnings or no warn- ings at all at a higher vehicle speed (above 70 km/h) for such vehicles.
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehicles could be disengaged due to dark- ness.
The collision warning system uses the same radar sensors as adaptive cruise control. For
more information on the radar sensor and its limitations, see page 170.
An absent or late warning could mean that there is no brake support or it comes late.
If warnings are perceived as being too frequent or disturbing then the warning distance can be reduced. This would lead to the system warn- ing at a later stage, which reduces the total number of warnings.
When the car is reversing Collision Warning with Auto Brake cannot be activated.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not acti- vated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is why the system does not intervene in situations where the car is approaching a vehicle in front very slowly, e.g. when parking.
Driver commands are always prioritised, which is why Collision Warning with Auto Brake does not intervene in situations where the driver is steering, braking or accelerating in a clear manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.
When Auto Brake has prevented a collision with a stationary object the car remains sta- tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is reduced to the same speed as that maintained by the vehicle in front.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
04
180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when Auto Brake has stopped the car, unless the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal beforehand.
Camera sensor limitations
The car's camera sensor is used by the three functions - Collision Warning with Auto Brake, Driver Alert Control, see page 183 and Lane Departure Warning, see page 186.
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor clean from ice, snow, mist and dirt.
Do not attach or fit anything to the wind- screen in front of the camera sensor, as this could reduce or prevent the function of one or more camera-dependent systems.
The camera sensors have limitations similar to the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in dark- ness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for example. Under such conditions the functions of camera-dependent systems could be sig- nificantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car- riageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings could also significantly reduce a camera sensor func- tion. Functions such as scanning the carriage- way and detecting other vehicles for example.
During very high temperatures the camera is temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes after the engine is started in order to protect camera functionality.
Fault tracing and action
If the display shows the message Windscreen
Sensors blocked then this means that the camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect vehicles or road markings in front of the car.
In turn this means that the Collision Warning with Auto Brake, Lane Departure Warning and Driver Alert Control functions are not operating with full functionality.
The following table presents possible causes for a message being shown along with the appropriate action.
Cause Action
The windscreen sur- face in front of the camera is dirty or covered with ice or snow.
Clean the wind- screen surface in front of the camera from dirt, ice and snow.
Thick fog, heavy rain or snow means that the camera does not work sufficiently well.
No action. At times the camera does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
The windscreen sur- face in front of the camera has been cleaned but the message remains.
Wait. It may take several minutes for the camera to meas- ure the visibility.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera.
Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the camera cover cleaned - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol Message Specification
Collis'n warning OFF Collision warning system switched off.
Shown when the engine is started.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button.
Collision warn. Unavailable The collision warning system cannot be activated.
Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button.
Auto braking was acti-
vated
Auto Brake has been active.
The message clears after one press of the READ button.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 180.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*
04
182 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Symbol Message Specification
Radar blocked. See man-
ual
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event that heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 170.
Collision warn. Service
required
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System DAC*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 183
General information on Driver Alert System
The Driver Alert System is intended to assist drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are driving on.
The Driver Alert System consists of two differ- ent functions, which can either be switched on at the same time or individually:
Driver Alert Control (DAC)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see page 186.
A switched-on function is set in standby mode and is not activated automatically until speed exceeds 65 km/h.
The function is deactivated again when speed decreases to below 60 km/h.
Both functions use a camera which is depend- ent on the lane having side markings painted on each side.
WARNING
The Driver Alert System does not work in all situations but is instead only intended to be of supplementary assistance.
The driver always has ultimate responsibility that the car is driven safely.
General information on Driver Alert Control - DAC
The function is intended to attract the driver's attention when he/she starts to drive less con- sistently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted or starts to fall asleep.
A camera detects the side markings painted on the carriageway and compares the section of the road with the driver's steering wheel move- ments. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow the carriageway evenly.
NOTE
The camera sensor has certain limitations, see page 180.
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly dete- riorating driving ability and it is primarily intended for major roads. The function is not intended for city traffic.
In some cases driving ability is not affected despite driver fatigue. In which case there may not be any warning issued for the driver. For this reason it is always important to stop and take a break in the event of any signs of driver fatigue, irrespective of whether or not DAC issues a warning.
NOTE
The function must not be used to extend a driving stint. Always plan breaks at regular intervals and ensure that you are fully rested.
Limitation
In some cases the system may issue a warning despite driving ability not deteriorating, for example:
if the driver tests the LDW function.
in strong side winds.
on rutted road surfaces.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System DAC*
04
184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Operation
Some settings are made from the centre con- sole display and its menu system. For informa- tion on how the menu system is used, see page 122.
The current status can be checked on the trip computer display with the left-hand stalk switch.
Thumbwheel. Turn until the display shows Driver
Alert. The second row displays the Off, U navailable or Level mark options.
READ confirms or clears a warning in the memory.
Activating Driver Alert Control
Using the centre console display with its menu system, search and locate Car settings
Driver Alert. Select the On option.
The function is activated when speed exceeds 65 km/h and remains active as long as the speed is over 60 km/h.
The display shows a level mark with 1-5 bars, where a low number of bars indicates incon- sistent driving style. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.
If the vehicle is driven inconsistently then the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal as well as the text message Driver Alert Time for a
break. The warning is repeated after a time if driving ability does not improve.
WARNING
An alarm should be taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her own condition.
In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tired- ness; stop the car in a safe manner as soon as possible and rest.
Studies have shown that it is equally as dan- gerous to drive while tired as it is under the influence of alcohol.
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol Message Specification
Driver Alert OFF Function not switched on.
Driver Alert Unavailable The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 180.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System DAC*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185
Symbol Message Specification
Driver Alert The function analyses the driver's driving style.
The number of bars can vary in the range 1-5, where a low number of bars indicates inconsistent driving ability. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.
Driver Alert Time for a
break
The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 180.
Driver Alert Sys Service
required
The system is disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System - LDW*
04
186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on Lane Departure Warning - LDW
The function is intended to reduce the risk for single-vehicle accidents accidents where, in certain situations, the vehicle leaves the car- riageway and is in danger of driving either into a ditch or into oncoming traffic.
LDW consists of a camera that detects the side markings painted on the carriageway. The driver is alerted by an acoustic signal if the vehicle crosses a side marking.
Operation and function
The function is switched on or off by means of a switch on the centre console. An indicator lamp in the button illuminates when the func- tion is switched on.
The trip computer display shows Lane Depart
Warn Unavailable when the function is in standby mode.
The LDW function is activated automatically from standby mode after the camera has scan- ned in the carriageway's side markings and speed exceeds 65 km/h. The trip computer display then shows Lane Depart Warn
Available.
If the camera can no longer detect the carria- geway's side markings or if speed decreases to below 60 km/h then the function resumes standby mode and the display shows Lane
Depart Warn Unavailable.
If the vehicle crosses the left or right-hand side marking of the carriageway without due cause then the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal.
No warning is given in the following situations:
Direction indicators activated
The driver has his/her foot on the brake pedal1
In the event of the accelerator pedal being depressed rapidly1
In the event of rapid steering wheel move- ments1
In the event of a sudden turn so that the car rolls.
The camera sensor also has certain limitations. For more information, see page 180.
NOTE
The driver is only warned once each time the wheels cross a line. So there is no acoustic alarm when there is a line between the car's wheels.
1 A warning is still given when Increased sensitivity is selected, see page 188.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System - LDW*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187
Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol Message Specification
Lane departure warning
On/Off
The function is switched on/off.
Shown at switch-on/off.
The text disappears after 5 seconds.
Lane Depart Warn Unavail-
able
Speed is lower than 60 km/h, the carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 180.
Lane Depart Warn Availa-
ble
The function scans the carriageway's side markings.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 180.
Driver Alert Sys Service
required
The system is disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Driver Alert System - LDW*
04
188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Personal preferences
See the centre console display with its menu system and there search for Car settings
Lane departure warning, see page 123.
Select from the options:
On at start up - This option sets the function in standby mode each time the engine is started. Otherwise the same value as when the engine was switched off is obtained.
Increased sensitivity This option increases sensitivity, an alarm is triggered earlier and fewer limitations apply.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park assist syst*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189
General
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console display indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.
Parking assistance is available in two variants:
Rear only
Both front and rear.
WARNING
Parking assistance does not relinquish the driver's own responsibility during parking.
The sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected.
Be aware of e.g. people or animals near the car.
Function
The system is automatically activated when the car is started and the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If parking assistance is switched off with the button, the lamp goes out.
Active
Active
Active
1
2
3
Display screens in different situations.
Display in a car with rear sensors only - obstacle detected by both right-hand sen- sors.
Display in a car with front and rear sensors - right-hand front sensor is 30 cm or closer to a detected obstacle.
Display in a car with front and rear sensors - no obstacle front or rear detected.
The centre console display shows an overview of the relationship between the car and detected obstacle.
Marked sectors show which of the four sen- sor(s) detected an obstacle. The more marked fields in the same sector, the shorter the dis- tance between the car and detected obstacle.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park assist syst*
04
190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The frequency of the signal increases the shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of or behind the car. Other sound from the audio system is muted automatically.
When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is constant and the marked sensors' bar is fully filled in, see figure (2). If the detected obstacle is within the distance for the constant tone both behind and in front of the car, then the tone sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.
Rear parking assistance G
02 14
23
The distance covered to the rear of the car is about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles behind comes from one of the rear loudspeakers.
Rear parking assistance is activated when reverse gear is engaged.
The system must be deactivated when revers- ing with a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar or similar - otherwise they would trigger the sensors.
NOTE
Rear parking assistance is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine trailer wiring is used.
Front parking assistance
G 02
14 24
The distance covered in front of the car is about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles in front comes from one of the front loudspeak- ers.
Front parking assistance is active up to 15 km/h. The lamp in the button is illuminated in order to indicate that the system is activated.
When the speed is below 10 km/h the system is reactivated.
NOTE
Front parking assistance is deactivated when the parking brake is applied or P mode is selected in a car with an automatic gear- box.
IMPORTANT
When fitting auxiliary lamps: Remember that they must not obscure the sensors the auxiliary lamps could then be detected as obstacles.
Fault indicator
If the information symbol illuminates with constant glow and the informa-
tion display shows Park assist syst Service
required then parking assistance is disen- gaged.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Park assist syst*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 191
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning sig- nals that are caused by external audio sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre- quencies that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Cleaning the sensors
Sensor location, front.
G 02
14 25
Sensor location, rear.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
BLIS* Blind Spot Information System
04
192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on BLIS
G 02
14 26
BLIS camera
Indicator lamp
BLIS symbol
BLIS is an information system based on cam- era technology that under certain conditions can help the driver to notice vehicles moving in the same direction as the host vehicle in the so- called "blind spot".
WARNING
The system is a supplement to, not a replacement for, a safe driving style and use of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace the driver's attention and responsibility. The responsibility for changing lanes safely always rests with the driver.
The system is designed to work most effec- tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane highways.
When a camera (1) has detected a vehicle inside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp (2) illuminates with a constant glow.
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.
BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault arises in the system. If for example the sys- tem's cameras are obscured then the BLIS indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown on the information display. In such cases, check and clean the lenses.
If necessary, the system can be switched off temporarily, see the section Activate/deacti- vate.
Blind spots
A = approx. 9.5 m and B = approx. 3 m
Activating/deactivating
Button for activating/deactivating.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
BLIS* Blind Spot Information System
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193
BLIS is activated when the engine is started. The indicator lamps in the door panels flash three times when BLIS is activated.
The system can be deactivated/activated after starting the engine with one press on the BLIS button.
When BLIS is deactivated, the lamp in the but- ton goes out and a message is shown in the instrument panel display.
When BLIS is activated the light in the button illuminates, a new text message is shown on the display and the indicator lamps in the door panels flash three times. Press the READ but- ton to delete the text message. (For a descrip- tion of messages, see page 126).
When BLIS operates
The system operates when the car is driven at a speed above 10 km/h.
Overtaking
The system is designed to react if:
you overtake another vehicle at a speed of up to 10 km/h faster than the other vehicle
you are overtaken by a vehicle travelling up to 70 km/h faster than you are travelling.
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is revers- ing.
A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can pre- vent the vehicle in the screened area from being detected by BLIS.
Daylight and darkness
In daylight the system reacts to the shape of the surrounding vehicles. The system is designed to detect motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.
In darkness the system reacts to the head- lamps of surrounding vehicles. If the head- lamps of surrounding vehicles are not switched on then the system does not detect the vehi- cles. This means for example that the system does not react to a trailer without headlamps which is towed behind a car or truck.
WARNING
The system does not react to cyclists or moped riders.
The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to those of the human eye, i.e. they do not "see" as well e.g. in heavy snowfall, against strong light or in thick fog.
Cleaning
In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam- era lenses must be clean. The lenses can be cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge. Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not scratched.
IMPORTANT
The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice or snow. If necessary, brush snow away from the lenses.
Messages on the display
Message Specification
Blind-spot info
system ON
The BLIS system is activated.
Blind spot syst.
Service required
Blind spot syst. dis- engaged - contact a workshop.
Blind spot syst.
Camera blocked
The BLIS camera is blocked by dirt, snow or ice - clean the lenses.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
BLIS* Blind Spot Information System
04
194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Message Specification
Blind spot syst.
Reduced function
Reduced function in the data transmis- sion between the BLIS system's cam- era and the car's electrical system.
The camera resets itself when the data transmission between the BLIS system's camera and the car's electri- cal system returns to normal.
Blind-spot info
system OFF
The BLIS system is deactivated.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS system components must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.
Limitations
In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate despite there being no other vehicle within the blind spot.
NOTE
If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso- lated occasions despite there being no other vehicle within the blind spot then this does not mean that a fault has arisen in the system.
In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the display shows the text Blind spot syst. Service required.
Here are several examples of situations where the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if there is no other vehicle within the blind spot.
Reflection from shiny wet road surface.
Own shadow on large light smooth surface, e.g. noise barrier or concrete road surface.
Low stationary sunlight shining into the camera.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
BLIS* Blind Spot Information System
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
04
196
Storage spaces
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 197
Storage compartment in door panel
Storage pocket* on front edge of front seat cushions
Ticket clip
Glovebox
Storage compartment, cup holder
Jacket holder
Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat
Storage pocket
Jacket holder
The jacket holder is only designed for light clothing.
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. in the glove compartment or other com- partments. Otherwise they may injure peo- ple in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision.
Tunnel console
Storage compartment (e.g. for CD discs), input for AUX and USB*1 (e.g. iPod ) under the armrest.
Includes cup holder for driver and passen- ger as well as 12 V socket and small com- partment. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter are specified then there is a cigarette lighter in the 12 V socket and a detachable ashtray in the small compartment.)
Cigarette lighter and ashtray*
The ashtray in the tunnel console is detached by lifting the tray straight up.
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button. The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull
out the lighter and light a cigarette on the heated coils.
Glovebox
The owner's manual and maps can be kept here for example. There are also holders for pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can be locked with the key blade, see page 43.
1 For RSE* the USB input is in a different location, see page 141.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
04
198 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Floor mats*
Volvo supplies specially manufactured floor mats.
WARNING
The floor mat at the driver's seat must be firmly fitted and secured in the attachment clips to prevent it from being trapped around and under the pedals.
Vanity mirror G
02 14
38
Vanity mirror with lighting.
The light illuminates automatically when the cover is lifted.
12 V socket
G 02
14 39
12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.
G 02
14 40
12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat.
The electrical socket can be used for 12 V accessories, such as mobile phone chargers and coolers. For the socket to supply current,
the remote control key must be in at least key position I, see page 69.
IMPORTANT
Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket is used at a time. If both sockets are used simultaneously, 7.5 A (90 W) per socket is applicable.
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use.
Electrical socket in cargo area*
For more information, see page 221.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment - Executive
04
199
Cooler box
G 02
18 57
There is a cooler box behind the armrest in the rear seat. The cooler box works when the engine is running or the remote control key is in position II.
WARNING
Store bottles well sealed in the cooler box and make sure that the door is closed for the journey.
NOTE
The cooler box needs to have free circula- tion of air for optimum function. For this rea- son you should leave at least 5 cm of space at the air intake for the cooler box in the cargo area.
Mat in cargo area
G 02
18 58
NOTE
The rear seat must be folded forward slightly in cars with refrigerator before the cargo area mat can be removed. Fold the backrest forward by pulling the handle, see page 73.
Glass
G 02
18 59
There is a storage compartment for two glasses and a bottle opener under the cover in the armrest.
WARNING
Store glasses in the storage compartment or in cup holders and make sure that the armrest cover is closed for the journey.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth handsfree*
04
200 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
System overview.
Mobile phone
Microphone
Steering wheel keypad
Centre console
BluetoothTM
A mobile phone equipped with BluetoothTM
can be connected wirelessly to the audio sys- tem. The audio system then works handsfree, with the option to control a range of the mobile phone's functions remotely. The mobile phone can be operated by its own keys irrespective of whether or not it is connected.
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fully compatible with the handsfree function. Volvo recommends that you seek assis- tance from an authorised Volvo dealer or visit www.volvocars.com for information on compatible phones.
Phone functions, controls overview
Centre console control panel.
VOLUME Same functionality available in steering wheel keypad.
Number and letter buttons
PHONE - On/off and standby mode
Navigation button
EXIT - End/refuse phone calls, clear entered characters, interrupt current func- tion. Same functionality available in steer- ing wheel keypad.
ENTER Accept calls. A press of the but- ton reveals latest dialled numbers. Same functionality available in steering wheel keypad.
Remember
The menus are controlled from the centre con- sole and the steering wheel keypad. For gen- eral information on menus, see page 122.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with both BluetoothTM handsfree and built-in phone then there is an additional menu (for chang- ing the phone) in the phone menu, see page 123.
Activating/deactivating
A short press on PHONE activates the hands- free function. The text PHONE at the top of the display shows that it is in phone mode. The symbol shows that the handsfree func- tion is active.
One long press on PHONE deactivates the handsfree function and disconnects a con- nected phone.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth handsfree*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 201
Connect mobile phone
A mobile phone is connected in different ways depending on whether or not it has been con- nected previously. To connect a mobile phone for the first time, follow one of the sets of instructions below:
Alternative 1 - via the car's menu system
1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visible via BluetoothTM, see mobile phone manual or www.volvocars.com.
2. Activate the handsfree function with PHONE. > Menu option Add phone appears on
the display. If one or more mobile phones have already been registered then these are also shown.
3. Select Add phone. > The audio system searches for mobile
phones in the vicinity. The search takes approximately 30 seconds. The mobile phones detected are specified with their respective BluetoothTM name in the dis- play. The handsfree function's BluetoothTM name is shown in the mobile phone such as My Car.
4. Choose one of the mobile phones in the audio system display.
5. Enter the number series shown in the audio system display via the mobile phone key- pad.
Alternative 2 - via the phone's menu system
1. Activate the handsfree function with PHONE. If there is a phone connected, disconnect the connected phone.
2. Search with the phone's BluetoothTM, see the mobile phone manual.
3. Select My Car in the list of units detected in your mobile phone.
4. Enter the PIN code '1234' into the mobile phone when prompted for the PIN code.
5. Select to connect to My Car from the mobile phone.
The mobile phone is registered and connected automatically to the audio system while the text Synchronising is shown in the display. For more information on how mobile phones are registered, see page 203.
When the connection is established the symbol is shown and the mobile phone Bluetooth
TM name is shown in the display. Now the
mobile phone can be controlled from the audio system.
To call
1. Make sure that the text PHONE is shown at the top of the display and that the symbol is visible.
2. Dial the number or use the phone book, see page 203.
3. Press ENTER.
The call is interrupted with EXIT.
Disconnecting the mobile phone
Automatic disconnection takes place if the mobile phone moves out of the audio system's range. For more information on connection, see page 203.
Manual disconnection takes place by deacti- vating the handsfree function with one long press on PHONE. The handsfree function is also deactivated when the engine is switched off or when a door is opened1.
When the mobile phone has been discon- nected an ongoing call can be continued with the mobile phone's built-in microphone and speaker.
1 Only Keyless Drive.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth handsfree*
04
202 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
Some mobile phones require that the changeover from handsfree is confirmed from the phone's keypad.
Making and receiving calls
Incoming call
Calls are accepted with ENTER even if the audio system is in CD or FM mode for example. Refuse or end with EXIT.
Automatic answer
The automatic answer function means that calls are accepted automatically.
Activate/deactivate under Call options
Automatic answer.
In call menu
Press MENU or ENTER during an ongoing call to access the following functions:
Mute microphone - audio system micro- phone is muted.
Transfer call to mobile - the call is trans- ferred to the mobile phone.
NOTE
With certain mobile phones the connection is terminated when the privacy function is used. This is normal. The handsfree function asks if you want to reconnect.
Phone book searching in the phone book.
NOTE
A new call cannot be started during an ongoing call.
Audio settings
Phone call volume
The call volume can be regulated when the handsfree function is in phone mode. Use the steering wheel keypad or VOLUME.
Audio system volume
Providing there is no ongoing call taking place, the audio system volume is controlled as usual with VOLUME. In order to control audio system volume during an ongoing call you have to switch to one of the audio sources.
The audio source can be automatically muted for incoming calls under Phone settings
Sounds and volume Mute radio.
Ring volume
Go to Phone settings Sounds and volume
Ring volume and adjust with / on the navigation button.
Ring signals
The handsfree function has integrated ring sig- nals that can be selected under Phone
settings Sounds and volume Ring
signals Ring signal 1 etc.
NOTE
The connected mobile phone's ring signal is not deactivated when one of the handsfree system's integrated signals is used.
In order to select the connected phone's ring signal2, go to Phone settings Sounds and
volume Ring signals Use mobile
phone signal.
2 Not supported by all mobile phones.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth handsfree*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 203
More on registering and connecting
A maximum of five mobile phones can be reg- istered. Registration is performed once per phone. After registration the phone no longer needs to be visible/detectable. A maximum of one mobile phone can be connected at a time. Phones can be deregistered under Bluetooth
Remove phone.
Automatic connection
When the handsfree function is active and the last mobile phone connected is in range it is connected automatically. When the audio sys- tem searches for the last phone connected its name is shown in the display. To change over to manual connection of another phone, press EXIT.
Manual connection
If you want to connect a mobile phone other than the last connected or change the con- nected mobile phone, proceed as follows:
1. Set the audio system in phone mode.
2. Press PHONE and select one of the phones in the list.
The connection can also be made via the menu system.
The menu structure is available in two variants depending on whether the car only has
BluetoothTM handsfree or if the car also has a built-in phone.
For cars with only BluetoothTM handsfree the connection is made under Main menu
Bluetooth Bluetooth Connect
phone or Main menu Bluetooth
Bluetooth Change phone Add
phone.
For cars with built-in phone and BluetoothTM handsfree the connection is made under Main menu Bluetooth
Bluetooth Connect phone or Main
menu Bluetooth Change phone
Add phone.
Phone book
All use of the phone book presupposes that the text PHONE is shown at the top of the display and that the symbol is visible.
The audio system stores a copy of the phone book from each registered mobile phone. The phone book is copied automatically to the audio system during each connection.
Deactivate the function under Phone
settings Synchronise phone book. Searching for contacts is only performed in the connected mobile phone's phone book.
NOTE
If the mobile phone does not support copy- ing of the phone book then List is empty is shown when copying is finished.
If the phone book contains a ringing caller's contact information then this is shown in the display.
Searching for contacts
The easiest way to search in the phone book is with long presses on the keys 29. This starts a search in the phone book based on the key's first letter.
The phone book can also be reached with / on the navigation button or with / on
the steering wheel keypad. The search can also be performed from the phone book's Search menu under Phone book Search:
1. Enter the first few letters of the contact and press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
2. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER to call.
Voice recognition
The mobile phone's voice recognition function for dialling can be used by holding in ENTER.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Bluetooth handsfree*
04
204 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fully compatible with the voice recognition func- tion. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer or visit www.volvocars.com for information on compatible phones.
Voice mail number
Voice mail number can be changed under Call
options Voice mail number. If there is no number stored then this menu can be reached with one long press on 1. Press 1 for a long time to use the stored number.
Call lists
The call lists are copied to the handsfree func- tion at each new connection and are then updated during the connection. Press ENTER
to show the last dialled. Other call lists are available under Call register.
NOTE
Certain mobile phones show a list of the last dialled calls in reverse order.
Inputting text
Input text using the keypad in the centre con- sole. Press once for the key's first character,
twice for the second etc. Continue pressing for more characters, see the following table.
A short press on EXIT deletes an input char- acter. One long press on EXIT clears all input characters. / on the navigation button scrolls between the characters.
Key Function
Space . 1 - ? ! , : " ' ( )
A B C 2
D E F 3
G H I 4
J K L 5
M N O 6
P Q R S 7
T U V 8
W X Y Z 9
Key Function
Pressed briefly if two characters shall be entered after each other with the same key.
+ 0 @ * # & $ / %
Shift between upper and lower case letter
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Built-in phone*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 205
General
System overview.
Microphone
SIM card reader
Keypad, see page 141.
Control panel
Privacy handset*
Safety
Engage a workshop to perform the service via the phone. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo work- shop. The built-in phone must be switched off during refuelling or in the vicinity of blasting work. IDIS limits the menu system depending on the speed of the car, see page 207.
Remember
SIM card
The phone can only be used with a valid SIM card Subscriber Identity Module. For installa- tion, see page 208. Emergency calls to emer- gency numbers can be made without a SIM card.
NOTE
The built-in phone cannot read 3G type SIM cards. Combined 3G/GSM cards work. Contact the network operator if the SIM card needs to be changed.
Menus and controls
The menus are navigated using the control panel (4) and the steering wheel keypad (3). For general information on menus, see page 122. For information on the phone's controls, see page 200.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with both BluetoothTM handsfree and built-in phone then there is an additional menu (for chang- ing the phone) in the phone menu, see page 123.
On/Off
Switch on the phone with a short press on PHONE. Enter the PIN code if necessary. The
symbol shows that the phone is switched on. When this symbol is shown calls can be received even if the CD menu for example is shown in the display. Briefly press PHONE to use the phone menus and to dial out. The text PHONE shows that the phone menu is active.
Switch off the phone with one long press on PHONE.
Making and receiving calls
Making calls
1. Switch on the phone.
2. If PHONE is not shown in the display, briefly press PHONE.
3. Dial the number or use the phone book, see page 206.
4. Press ENTER for handsfree calls or pick up the privacy handset*. Release the handset by pulling it down.
Ending a call
End a call by pressing EXIT or by hanging up the privacy handset*.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Built-in phone*
04
206 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Incoming call
Press ENTER for handsfree calls or pick up the privacy handset*. If the privacy handset* is off the hook when the phone rings then calls must be received using ENTER.
End calls by pressing EXIT or by hanging up the privacy handset*. Refuse calls using EXIT.
Automatic answer
See page 202.
Call waiting
The function enables a new call to be answered during an ongoing call. The new call is answered as usual and the previous call is put on hold.
Activate/deactivate under Call options
Call waiting.
Automatic diversions
Incoming calls can be diverted automatically depending on the type of call and situation.
Activate/deactivate under Call options
Diversions.
During a call
Press MENU or ENTER during a call to access the In-call menu.
To call
1. Put the call on hold under Hold.
2. Dial the number of the third party or use the Phone book menu option.
Switch between calls using the Swap menu option.
Conference call
A conference call consists of several parties. It can be initiated when a call is underway and another is on hold. The Join menu option starts the conference call.
All ongoing calls are disconnected if the con- ference call is terminated.
Switching between the privacy handset*
and handsfree
Switch from handsfree to the privacy hand- set* by picking up the privacy handset or selecting in the menu.
Switch from the privacy handset* to handsfree using the Handsfree menu option.
Mute mode
Mute mode involves deactivating the micro- phone, see page 205.
Activate/deactivate the microphone using the Microphone on/Mute microphone
menu option.
Audio settings
Phone call volume
The phone uses the front door speakers. Call volume can be controlled when the text PHONE is shown at the top of the display.
Use the steering wheel keypad or VOLUME.
Audio system volume
See page 142.
Signals and volume
Change the ring signal under Phone settings
Sounds and volume Ring signals.
Activate/deactivate the message beep under Phone settings Sounds and volume
Message beep.
Control the ring volume under Phone settings
Sounds and volume Ring volume. Adjust using / on the navigation button.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Built-in phone*
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 207
Phone book
Contact information can be stored on the SIM card or in the phone.
Storing contacts in the phone book
1. Press MENU and scroll to Phone book
New contact.
2. Enter a name and press ENTER. For infor- mation on text input, see below.
3. Enter a number and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to SIM card or Phone memory and press ENTER.
Inputting text
See page 204.
Searching for contacts
See page 203.
Erasing contacts
Erase a contact in the phone book by selecting it and pressing ENTER. Then scroll to Erase
and press ENTER.
Erase all contacts under Phone book Erase
SIM or Erase phone.
Copying entries between the SIM card
and the phone book
Go to Phone book Copy all SIM to
phone or Phone to SIM and press ENTER.
Voice mail number
See page 204.
Other functions and settings
IDIS
IDIS (Intelligent Driver Information System) can, in active driving situations, delay or refuse ring signals from incoming calls. This way less attention is distracted from driving.
IDIS is deactivated under Phone settings
IDIS.
Reading messages
1. Scroll to Messages Read and press ENTER.
2. Scroll to a message and press ENTER.
3. The message text is shown in the display. Additional selections can be made by pressing ENTER.
Writing and sending messages
1. Scroll to Messages Write new and press ENTER.
2. Enter text and press ENTER. For informa- tion on text input, see page 204.
3. Scroll to Send and press ENTER.
4. Enter a phone number and press ENTER.
Message settings
Message settings are not normally changed. The network provider has further information on these settings. There are three options under Messages Message settings:
SMSC number - Specifies the message centre which will transfer the messages.
Validity time - Specifies how long the message will be stored in the message centre.
Message type.
Call lists
Lists of received, dialled and missed calls are stored in Call register. Dialled calls are also shown by pressing ENTER. The phone num- bers in the lists can be saved in the phone book.
Call duration
Call duration is stored under Call register
Call duration.
Reset the values under Call register
Call duration Reset timers.
Show/hide number for third party
The phone number can be temporarily hidden under Call options Send my number.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
Built-in phone*
04
208 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
IMEI number
In order to block a phone the network provider must be advised of the phone's IMEI number.
Dial *#06# to show the number in the dis- play. Write it down and keep it in a safe place.
Network selection
The network can be selected either automati- cally or manually under Phone settings
Network selection.
SIM code and security
The PIN code can protect the SIM card from unauthorised use.
The code can be changed under Phone
settings Edit PIN code.
Change the security level under Phone
settings SIM security.
Select maximum security with the On option. The code will then need to be entered each time the phone is switched on.
Select the next highest security level with the Automatic option. The phone then stores the code and automatically specifies it when the phone is switched on. When the SIM card is used with another phone the code must be entered manually.
Select minimum security with the Off option. The SIM card can then be used without the code at all.
Reset to factory settings
The phone settings are fully reset under Phone
settings Reset Phone settings.
Installing the SIM card
G 02
14 50
G 02
14 51
Make sure that the phone is deactivated. Pull out the SIM card holder which is located in the glovebox.
Place the SIM card with the metal surface visible and fit the cover on the SIM card holder . Refit the SIM card holder.
04 Comfort and driving pleasure
04
209
210
Recommendations during driving......................................................... 212 Refuelling.............................................................................................. 215 Fuel....................................................................................................... 216 Loading................................................................................................. 220 Cargo area ........................................................................................... 222 Driving with a trailer.............................................................................. 223 Towing and recovery............................................................................. 229
DURING YOUR JOURNEY
05 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
05
212
General
Economical driving
Driving economically means driving smoothly while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving style and speed to the prevailing conditions.
Avoid driving with open windows.
Do not use winter tyres when the winter season is over.
Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration and heavy braking.
Remove unnecessary items from the car - the greater the load the higher the fuel con- sumption.
Use engine braking to slow down, when it can take place without risk to other road users.
Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted to the current traffic situation and road - lower engine speeds result in lower fuel consumption.
A roof load and ski box increase air resis- tance, leading to higher fuel consumption - remove the load carriers when not in use.
Do not run the engine to operating tem- perature at idling speed, but rather drive with a light load as soon as possible - a cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one.
Cars with the D5 engine and 6-speed man- ual transmission are started in 2nd gear under normal conditions.
For more information and further advice, see the pages 11 and 294.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving, such as downhill, this deactivates important systems such as the power steering and brake servo.
Driving in water
The car can be driven through water at a maxi- mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of 10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised when passing through flowing water.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed and do not stop the car. When the water has been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake function is achieved. Water and mud for example can make the brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake function.
Clean the electric contacts of the electric engine block heater and trailer coupling after driving in water and mud.
Do not let the car stand with water over the sills for any long period of time - this could cause electrical malfunctions.
IMPORTANT
Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.
In depths greater than 25 cm, water could enter the transmission. This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of these systems.
In the event of the engine stalling in water, do not try restart - tow the car from the water to a workshop - an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended. Risk of engine breakdown.
Engine, gearbox and cooling system
Under special conditions, for example hard driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk that the engine and drive system may overheat - in particular with a heavy load.
For information about overheating when driv- ing with a trailer, see page 223.
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille when driving in hot climates.
If the temperature in the engine's cooling system is too high the instrument panel's warning symbol is illuminated and there is a text message displayed there High
engine temp Stop safely - stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes to cool down.
05 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
05
213
If the text message High engine temp
Stop engine or Coolant level low, Stop
engine is shown then the engine must be switched off after stopping the car.
In the event of overheating in the gearbox a built-in protection function is activated which, amongst other things, illuminates the instrument panel's warning symbol and there is a text message displayed there Transmission hot Reduce speed or Transmission hot Stop safely - follow the recommendation given and lower the speed and stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for a few minutes to allow the gearbox to cool down.
If the car overheats, the air conditioning may be switched off temporarily.
Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to operate for a while after the engine has been switched off.
Open boot lid
WARNING
Do not drive with the boot lid open. Toxic exhaust fumes can be drawn into the car through the cargo area.
Do not overload the battery
The electrical functions in the car load the bat- tery to varying degrees. Avoid using the key position II when the engine is switched off. Instead use the I mode - which uses less power.
Also, be aware of different accessories that load the electrical system. Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the engine is switched off. Examples of such functions are:
ventilation fan
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume)
headlamps.
If the battery voltage is low the information dis- play shows the text Low battery Power save
mode. The energy-saving function then shuts down certain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan and/or audio system.
In which case, charge the battery by star- ting the engine and then running it for at
least 15 minutes - battery charging is more effective during driving than running the engine at idling speed while stationary.
Before a long journey
Check that the engine is working normally and that fuel consumption is normal.
Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid).
Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.
Carrying a warning triangle is a legal requirement in certain countries.
Winter driving
Check the following in particular before the cold season:
The engine coolant must contain at least 50% glycol. This mixture protects the engine against frost erosion down to approximately 35 C. To achieve optimum antifreeze protection, different types of gly- col must not be mixed.
The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent condensation.
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate star- ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel consumption while the engine is cold. For more information on suitable oils, see page 290.
05 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
05
214
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard driving or in hot weather.
The condition of the battery and charge level must be inspected. Cold weather pla- ces great demands on the battery and its capacity is reduced by the cold.
Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec- ommends using winter tyres on all four wheels if there is a risk of snow or ice.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries. Studded tyres are not permitted in all countries.
Slippery driving conditions
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts.
05 During your journey
Refuelling
05
215
Refuelling
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
Open the fuel filler flap using the button on the lighting panel - the flap opens when the button is released.
The filler flap is located on the right-hand rear wing, as indicated by the information display's arrow by the symbol .
Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in until a click confirms that it is closed.
Opening the fuel filler flap manually
G 02
46 31
The fuel filler flap can be opened manually when electric opening from the passenger compartment is not possible.
1. Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo area (same side as fuel filler flap) and locate the green cord with handle.
2. Pull the cord gently straight back until the fuel filler flap folds out with a "click".
IMPORTANT
Pull the wire gently - minimal force is required to disengage the hatch lock.
Opening/closing the fuel cap
A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in the event of high outside temperatures. Open the cap slowly.
After refuelling, refit the cap and turn it until one or more clicking sounds are heard.
Filling up with fuel
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump nozzle cuts out.
NOTE
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.
05 During your journey
Fuel
05
216
General information on fuel
Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended by Volvo must not be used as engine power and fuel consumption is negatively affected.
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and get- ting fuel splashes in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swal- lowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- ting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury.
IMPORTANT
Mixing different types of fuel or the use of fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo's guarantees, and any associated service agreement. This applies to all engines. NOTE: It does not apply to cars with engines that are adapted to run on ethanol fuel (E85).
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi- nation with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.
Catalytic converters
The purpose of the catalytic converters is to purify exhaust gases. They are located close to the engine so that operating temperature is reached quickly.
The catalytic converters consist of a monolith (ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rho- dium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chem- ical reaction without being used up them- selves.
Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel economy.
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This value is fed into an electronic system that con- tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is continuously adjusted. These adjustments create optimal conditions for efficient combustion, and together with the three-way catalytic converter reduce harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, car- bon monoxide and nitrous oxides).
Petrol
Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Most engines can be run with octane ratings of 95 and 98 RON. 91 RON should only be used in exceptional cases.
95 RON can be used for normal driving.
98 RON is recommended for optimum per- formance and minimum fuel consumption.
When driving in temperatures above +38 C, fuel with the highest possible octane rating is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.
05 During your journey
Fuel
05
217
IMPORTANT
Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as not to damage the catalytic converter.
Do not use additives not recommended by Volvo.
Bioethanol E85
Do not modify the fuel system or its compo- nents, and do not replace components with parts that are not specifically designed for use with bioethanol.
WARNING
Methanol must not be used. A decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap shows the correct alternative fuel.
The use of components not designed for bioethanol engines could cause fire, injury or engine damage.
Reserve fuel can
The reserve fuel can should be filled with petrol, see the NOTE box, page 103.
IMPORTANT
Make sure the reserve fuel can is securely fastened and that its cap is sealed.
WARNING
Ethanol is sensitive to sparks, and explosive gases could form in the reserve fuel can if it is refuelled with ethanol.
Diesel
Diesel must fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204 standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to con- taminants, such as excessively high volumes of sulphur particles for example. Only use die- sel fuel from well-known producers. Never use diesel of dubious quality.
At low temperatures (-6 C to -40 C), a paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel fuel designed for low temperatures around freezing point is available from the major oil companies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem- peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre- cipitate.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When
refuelling, check that the area around the fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter- gent and water.
IMPORTANT
Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European diesel standard.
The sulphur content must be a maximum of 50 ppm.
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels which must not be used:
Special additives
Marine Diesel Fuel
Fuel oil
RME1 (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegeta- ble oil.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.
Empty tank
The design of the fuel system in a diesel engine means that if the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.
05 During your journey
Fuel
05
218 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
tank may need to be vented in the workshop in order to restart the engine after fuelling.
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel star- vation, the fuel system needs a few moments to carry out a check. Do this before starting the engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with diesel:
1. Place the remote key in the ignition switch and push it gently so that it is pulled in (see page 69).
2. Press the START button without depress- ing the brake and/or clutch pedal.
3. Wait approx. 1 minute. 4. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/
or clutch pedal and then press the START button again.
Draining condensation from the fuel filter
The fuel filter separates condensation from the fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera- tion.
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet or if you suspect that the car has been filled with contaminated fuel.
IMPORTANT
Certain special additives remove the water separation in the fuel filter.
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter, which results in more efficient emission con- trol. The particles in the exhaust gases are col- lected in the filter during normal driving. So- called "regeneration" is started in order to burn away the particles and empty the filter. This requires the engine to have reached normal operating temperature.
Regeneration of the filter takes place automat- ically at an interval of approximately 300-900 km depending on driving conditions. Regeneration normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may take a little longer at a low average speed. Fuel consumption may increase slightly during regeneration.
Regeneration in cold weather
If the car is frequently driven short distances in cold weather then the engine does not reach normal operating temperature. This means that regeneration of the diesel particle filter does not take place and the filter is not emptied.
When the filter has become approximately 80% full of particles, a warning triangle on the instrument panel illuminates, and the message Soot filter full. See manual is shown on the instrument panel display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car until the engine reaches normal operating tem- perature, preferably on a main road or motor-
way. The car should then be driven for approx- imately 20 minutes more.
NOTE
A smaller reduction of engine power may be noticed temporarily during regeneration.
When regeneration is complete the warning text is cleared automatically.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that the engine reaches normal operating tempera- ture more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter fills up with particles then it can be difficult to start the engine and the filter will be incapable of functioning. Then there is a risk that the filter will have to be replaced.
Fuel consumption and emissions of carbon dioxide
Fuel consumption figures may change if the car is equipped with extra equipment that affects the car's weight. See information on weights page 284 and table page 293.
The manner in which the car is driven, and other non-technical factors can also affect fuel consumption.
05 During your journey
Fuel
05
219
Consumption is higher and power output lower for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi- nation with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.
05 During your journey
Loading
05
220
General information on loading
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. For more detailed infor- mation on weights, see page 284.
The boot lid is opened via a button on the lighting panel or the remote con-
trol key, see page 52.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change depending on the weight and distribution of the load.
To bear in mind when loading
Position the load firmly against the back- rest in front.
Put wide loads in the centre.
Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on lowered backrests.
Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery.
Secure all loads to the load retaining eye- lets with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.
WARNING
The protection provided by the inflatable curtain in the headlining may be compro- mised or eliminated by high loads.
Never load cargo above the backrest.
WARNING
Always secure the load. During heavy brak- ing the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with something soft.
Switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading/unloading long items. Otherwise you may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load into a drive position - and the car could then move off.
Front seat
The passenger seat backrest can also be folded for an extra long load, see page 71.
Roof load
Using load carriers
To avoid damaging the car and for maximum possible safety while driving, the load carriers designed by Volvo are recommended.
Carefully follow the installation instructions supplied with the carriers.
Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps.
Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.
The size of the area exposed to the wind, and therefore fuel consumption, increase with the size of the load.
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy braking and hard cornering.
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving cha- racteristics are altered by roof loads. For information on maximum permitted roof load, including load carriers and any space box, see page 284.
05 During your journey
Loading
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 221
Lowering the rear seat backrest
If the rear seat backrest needs to be lowered, see page 73.
Load retaining eyelets
The folding load retaining eyelets are used to fasten straps in order to anchor items in the cargo area.
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects that are loose or protrude could cause injury during heavy braking. Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Bag holder*
G 02
14 63
Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor.
The bag holder keeps carrier bags in place and prevents them from overturning and spreading their contents across the cargo area.
1. Fold up the holder, which is part of the floor hatch.
2. Fasten the bags with strap and secure the carrying handle in the hooks.
12 V electrical socket*
G 02
14 42
Raise the cover to access the electrical socket. The socket also provides voltage when the remote control key is not in the ignition switch.
NOTE
Remember not to use the electrical socket with the engine switched off because of the risk of discharging the car's battery.
05 During your journey
Cargo area
05
222
Ski hatch
The hatch in the backrest can be opened to transport long narrow items.
Fold the right-hand backrest forward.
Release the hatch in the rear seat backrest by sliding the bolt up while pressing the hatch down/forward.
Fold back the backrest with the hatch open.
Use the seatbelt to prevent the load from mov- ing.
WARNING
Stop the engine and apply the parking brake when loading and unloading. Otherwise the gear lever/selector can accidentally be knocked and moved to a driving position.
Removing the hatch
After the hatch has been released and the backrest folded backwards, open the hatch approx. 30 degrees and pull it straight up.
Attaching the hatch
Refit the hatch in the grooves behind the upholstery and close the hatch.
05 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 223
General
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. For more detailed information on weights, see page 284.
If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then the car is delivered with the necessary equip- ment for driving with a trailer.
The car's towing bracket must be of an approved type.
If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for driving with a trailer.
Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towing bracket complies with the specified maximum towball load.
Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- mended pressure for a full load. For tyre pressure label location, see page 240.
The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer.
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new. Wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km.
The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed.
For safety reasons, the maximum permit- ted speed for the car when coupled with a trailer should not be exceeded. Follow the regulations in force for the permitted speeds and weights.
Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long, steep ascents.
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12%.
Trailer cable
An adapter is required if the car's towing bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has 7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground.
Direction indicators and brake lights on
the trailer
If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indica- tors are broken, then the combined instrument panel's symbol for direction indicators flashes faster than normal and the display shows the text Bulb fail - Ind. signal trailer.
If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light are broken then the Bulb fail - Stop lamp
trailer text is shown.
Level control*
The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant height irrespective of the car's load (up to the maximum permissible weight). When the car is
stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly, which is normal.
Trailer weights
For information on Volvo's permitted trailer weights, see page 286.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking.
Manual gearbox
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
Do not run the engine at higher revolutions than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm) - otherwise the oil temperature may become too high.
05 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
05
224
Diesel engine 5-cyl
In the event of a risk of overheating the optimal speed for the engine is 2300-3000 rpm for optimal circulation of the coolant.
Automatic gearbox
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
An automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear related to load and engine speed.
In the event of overheating a warning sym- bol illuminates on the instrument panel combined with a text message - follow the recommendation given.
Steep inclines
Do not lock the automatic transmission in a higher gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not always a good idea to drive at a high gear with low engine revolutions.
IMPORTANT
See also the specific information on slow driving with trailer for cars with the Powershift automatic transmission on page 109.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Activate the parking brake.
3. Move the gear selector to position P.
4. Release the foot brake.
Move the gear selector to park position P when parking an automatic car with a hitched trailer. Always use the parking brake.
Block the wheels with chocks when park- ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Move the gear selector to driving posi- tion D.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Release the foot brake and start driving off.
Towing bracket
If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar, the installation instructions for the loose sec- tion must be followed carefully, see page 226.
WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar:
Follow the installation instructions care- fully.
The detachable section must be locked with the key before setting off.
Check that the indicator window shows green.
Important checks
The towbar's towball must be cleaned and greased regularly.
NOTE
If a towball hitch with vibration damper is used, it is not necessary to grease the tow- ball.
05 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
05
225
Storing the detachable towbar
Towbar storage space.
IMPORTANT
Always remove the towbar after use and store it in the appointed location in the car, firmly fastened with its strap.
Specifications
G 02
14 85
G 02
14 83
G 02
14 84
Dimensions, mounting points (mm)
1 1127
2 93
3 855
4 428
5 112
6 360
7 Side member
8 Ball centre
05 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
05
226
Attaching the towbar
G 01
89 28
Remove the protective cover by first press- ing in the catch and then pulling the cover straight back .
G 02
14 87
Ensure that the mechanism is in the unlocked position by turning the key clock- wise.
G 02
14 88
The indicator window must show red.
G 02
14 89
Insert the towbar until you hear a click.
G 02
14 90
The indicator window must show green.
G 00
00 00
Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi- tion. Remove the key from the lock.
05 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
05
227
G 02
14 94
Check that the towbar is secure by pulling it up, down and back.
WARNING
If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it must be detached and reattached in accordance with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT
Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch, the remainder of the towbar should be clean and dry.
G 02
14 95
Safety cable.
WARNING
Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable to the correct place.
Removing the towbar
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the unlocked position.
Push in the locking wheel and turn it anticlockwise until you hear a click.
Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it comes to a stop. Hold it in this position while pulling the towbar rearward and upward.
WARNING
Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in the car, see page 225.
05 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
05
228
G 01
89 29
Push the protective cover until it snaps tight.
05 During your journey
Towing and recovery
05
229
Towing
Find out the highest legal speed for towing before towing the car.
1. Press the remote control key into the igni- tion switch to unlock the steering lock so that the car can be steered, see page 69.
2. The remote control key must remain in the ignition switch while the car is being towed.
3. Keep the towline taut when the towing vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot gently pressed on the brake pedal - thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.
4. Be prepared to brake to stop.
WARNING
The steering lock must be unlocked before towing.
The remote control key must be in key position II.
Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed.
WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off. The brake pedal must be pressed about five times harder than normal, and the steering will be considerably heavier than normal.
Manual gearbox
Move gear lever into neutral and release the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox, Geartronic
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.
Cars with automatic gearbox must not be towed at speeds above 80 km/h or further than 80 km.
Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox, Powershift
The 2.0, 2.0T and 2.0F models with Powershift automatic transmission should not be towed as the transmission is dependent on the engine running in order to receive sufficient lubrica- tion.
IMPORTANT
Avoid towing.
However, the car can be towed for a short distance at low speed to move it from a dangerous position - not further than 10 km and not faster than 10 km/h. Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling for- ward.
In the event of moving a longer distance than 10 km, the car must be transported with the drive wheels raised from the road - professional recovery is recom- mended.
Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake.
Jump starting
Do not tow the car to bump start the engine. Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged and the engine does not start, see page 105.
IMPORTANT
Bump starting the car can damage the cat- alytic converter.
05 During your journey
Towing and recovery
05
230
Towing eye
The towing eye is screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or rear.
Attaching the towing eye
Take out the towing eye that is located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
The cover for the towing eye's attachment point is available in two variants which must be opened in different ways:
Open the variant with a recess using a coin or similar inserted in the recess, turning it outwards. Then turn out the cover completely and remove it.
The second variant has a marking along one side or in a corner: Press the mark- ing with a finger and fold out the oppo- site side/corner at the same time using a coin or similar - the cover turns around its axis and can then be removed.
Screw the towing eye right in up to its flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g. using the wheel wrench.
After use, unscrew the towing eye and return it to its place.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
NOTE
On certain cars with towbar fitted the towing eye cannot be attached in the rear bracket. Attach the towrope in the towbar.
For this reason it is advisable to store the detachable towbar's towball in the car.
Recovery
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be transpor- ted with the wheels rolling forward.
An All Wheel Drive car (AWD) with raised front suspension must not be towed at speeds above 70 km/h. It should not be towed further than 50 km.
05 During your journey
05
231
232 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General ................................................................................................. 234 Changing wheels .................................................................................. 238 Tyre pressure ....................................................................................... 240 Warning triangle and first-aid kit*.......................................................... 241 Emergency puncture repair (TMK)* ...................................................... 242
WHEELS AND TYRES
06 Wheels and tyres
General
06
234
Driving characteristics
Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte- ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pres- sure and speed rating are important for how the car performs.
Direction of rotation
G 02
17 78
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to only turn in one direction have the direction of rotation marked with an arrow. The tyre must always rotate in the same direction throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched between front and rear positions, never between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa. If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics and capacity to force rain and slush out of the way are adversely affected.
Tyres with the greatest tread depth should always be fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of skidding).
NOTE
Ensure that tyres of the same type and dimensions, and also the same make, are fitted to all four wheels.
Follow the recommended tyre pressures specified in the tyre pressure table, see page 297.
Tyre care
Tyre age
All tyres older than 6 years old should be checked by an expert even if they seem undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are hardly ever or never used. The func- tion can therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that are stored for future use. Exam- ples of external signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discol- oration.
New tyres
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible when you replace them. This is espe- cially important with regard to winter tyres. The last four digits in the sequence mean the week and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking (Department of Transportation), and this is stated with four digits, for example 1510. The tyre in the illustration was manufac- tured in week 15 of 2010.
Summer and winter tyres
When summer and winter wheels are changed the wheels should be marked with which side of the car they were mounted on, for example L for left and R for right.
06 Wheels and tyres
General
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 235
Wear and maintenance
The correct tyre pressure results in more even wear, see page 240. Driving style, tyre pres- sure, climate and road condition affect how quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif- ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can be switched with each other. A suitable dis- tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km and then at 10 000 km intervals. Volvo recom- mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth. If significant differences in wear (>1 mm difference in tread depth) between tyres have already occurred, the least worn tyres must always be placed on the rear. Understeer is normally easier to correct than oversteer, and leads to the car continuing for- wards in a straight line rather than having the rear end skidding to one side, resulting in pos- sible complete loss of control over the car. This is why it is important for the rear wheels never to lose grip before the front wheels.
Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging up - and not standing up.
WARNING
A damaged tyre can lead to loss of control of the car.
Tyres with tread wear indicators
G 02
18 29
Tread wear indicators.
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless bands across the width of the tread. On the side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height with the tread wear indicators. Change to new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and snow.
Rims and wheel bolts
IMPORTANT
The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140 Nm. Overtightening can damage the nuts and the bolts.
Only use rims that are tested and approved by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accesso- ries. Check the torque with a torque wrench.
Locking wheel bolts*
Locking wheel bolts* can be used on both alu- minium and steel rims. Under the cargo area floor there is space for the sleeve for the lock- able wheel bolts.
Tools
Located under the cargo area floor are the car's towing eye, jack* and wheel wrench*. There is also space for the sleeve for the lock- able wheel bolts.
Jack*
The jack's thread must always be well greased.
06 Wheels and tyres
General
06
236 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The original jack should only be used for changing to the spare wheel. The jack's thread must always be well greased.
Tools - returning into place
G 02
93 36
The tools and jack* must be returned to their correct places after use. The jack needs to be cranked together to the correct position in order to have space.
The foam block and spare wheel are replaced in the reverse order to taking out.
Note that there is an arrow on the upper foam block. It must point forwards in the car.
IMPORTANT
The tools and jack* must be stored in the intended location in the car's cargo area when not in use.
Winter tyres
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four wheels.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types are most suitable.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country.
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem- peratures place considerably higher demands on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo there- fore recommends not to drive on winter tyres that have a tread depth of less than 4 millime- tres.
Using snow chains
Snow chains may only be used on the front wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva- lent chains designed for the car model, and tyre and rim dimensions. In the event of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you consult an authorised Volvo workshop. The wrong snow chains may cause serious damage to your car and lead to an accident.
Specifications
The car has whole vehicle approval. This means that certain combinations of wheels and tyres are approved. For the permissible com- binations, see page 296
Wheel (rim) dimensions
Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimen- sions, for example: 7Jx16x50.
7 Rim width in inches
J Rim flange profile
06 Wheels and tyres
General
06
237
16 Rim diameter in inches
50 Off-set in mm (dis- tance from wheel centre to wheel con- tact surface against the hub)
Tyre dimensions
225/50R17 98W.
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres. Example of designation:
225 Tyre width (mm)
50 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre width (%)
R Radial ply
17 Rim diameter in inches (")
98 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre load, tyre load index (LI)
W Speed rating for maximum permitted speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case 270 km/h).
Load index
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a load index (LI). The car's weight determines
the load capacity required of the tyres. Mini- mum permitted index is specified in the table, see page 296.
Speed ratings
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum speed, a speed rating (Speed Symbol; SS).
Tyre speed class must at least correspond with the car's top speed. Minimum permitted speed rating is specified in the table, see page 296.
The only exception to these conditions is win- ter tyres (both those with metal studs and those without), where a lower speed rating may be used. If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of 160 km/h).
Traffic regulations determine how fast a car can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres.
NOTE
It is the maximum permitted speed that is stated in the table.
Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
T 190 km/h
H 210 km/h
V 240 km/h
W 270 km/h
Y 300 km/h
WARNING
The car must be fitted with tyres which have the same or a higher load index (LI) and speed rating (SS) than specified. If a tyre with too low a load index or speed rating is used, it may overheat.
06 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
06
238 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Removing
Set up the warning triangle, see page 241 if a wheel must be replaced at a busy location. The car and jack* must be on a firm horizontal sur- face.
1. Apply the parking brake and engage reverse gear, or position P if the car has an automatic gearbox.
If the car has full hubcaps then these should be removed.
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack* that belongs to the car model in question, which is indicated on the jack's label.
The label also indicates the jack's maximum lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting height.
2. Take out the spare wheel*, jack* and wheel wrench* that are located under the cargo area floor in the cargo area. If another jack is selected, see page 248.
3. Remove any full hubcaps.
4. Place chocks in front of and behind the wheels which will remain on the ground. Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones for example.
G 01
74 65
5. (For cars with steel rims.) Prize off the wheel cover with the end of the wheel wrench, or pull it off by hand.
6. Loosen the wheel bolts -1 turn anticlock- wise with the wheel wrench.
WARNING
Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack and the car's jacking point.
7. There are two jacking points on each side of the car. There is a recess in the plastic cover at each point. Crank the foot of the jack down so it is pressed squarely on the ground.
IMPORTANT
The ground must be firm, smooth and level.
8. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel.
Installation
1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel and hub.
06 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 239
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts thoroughly.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot rotate.
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is important that the wheel bolts are tight- ened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check the torque with a torque wrench.
5. Refit any full hubcaps.
NOTE
The hubcap outlet for the valve must be located over the valve on the rim when fit- ted.
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack.
Park the car so that passengers have the car - or preferably a crash barrier - between them and the road.
Spare wheel*
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only intended for use temporarily and must be replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as pos- sible. The car's handling may be altered by the use of the spare wheel. The spare wheel is smaller than the normal wheel. The car's ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not machine wash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle, you cannot use snow chains at the same time. On all-wheel drive cars the drive on the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare wheel must not be repaired. The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tyre pressure table, see page 297.
IMPORTANT
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare wheel on the car.
IMPORTANT
The car must never be driven fitted with more than one temporary spare wheel.
The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel well with the outside down. The same bolt runs through to secure the spare wheel and the foam block. The foam block contains all the tools.
Taking out the spare wheel
1. Fold up the cargo area floor, from the rear and forwards.
2. Undo the retaining screw.
3. Lift out the foam block with its tools.
4. Lift out the spare wheel.
06 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure
06
240
Tyre pressure
G 02
18 30
The tyre pressure decal on the driver's side door pillar (between frame and rear door) shows which pressures the tyres should have at different loads and speed conditions. This is also specified in the tyre pressure table, see page 297.
Tyre pressure for the car's recommended tyre dimension
ECO pressure1
Spare wheel tyre pressure (Temporary Spare)
NOTE
Temperature differences change the tyre pressure.
Fuel economy, ECO pressure
At speeds under 160 km/h, the general tyre pressure is recommended (applies for both full load and light load) in order to obtain optimum fuel economy.
Checking the tyre pressure
The tyre pressures must be checked every month.
This also applies to the car's spare wheel.
Check tyre pressures on cold tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same tempera- ture as the ambient temperature. After several kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.
Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con- sumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs the car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could result in the tyres overheating and being damaged. Tyre pres- sure affects travelling comfort, road noise and steering characteristics.
NOTE
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature.
1 ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.
06 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241
Warning triangle The warning triangle is fitted on the inside of the boot lid with two clips.
Detach the warning triangle case by pulling both of the snap latches outwards.
Take the warning triangle from the case, fold out and assemble the two loose sides.
Fold out the warning triangle's support legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suit- able place with regard to traffic.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are properly secured in the cargo area after use.
First aid kit*
A case with first aid equipment is located in the cargo area.
06 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
06
242 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
Emergency puncture repair (TMK; Temporary Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust tyre pressure. It consists of a compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works as a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced before its expira- tion date and after use.
The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc- tured in the tread.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in
the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency puncture repair kit if they have larger slits, cracks or similar damage.
12 V sockets* for connecting the compressor are located by the centre console in the front, by the rear seat and in the cargo area. Choose the electrical socket that is nearest the punc- tured tyre.
Location of the emergency puncture
repair kit
Set up the warning triangle if a tyre is being sealed in a trafficked location. The emergency puncture repair kit is located under the floor in the cargo area.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
Overview
Label, maximum permitted speed
Switch
Cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve
Air hose
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
06 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 243
Sealing punctured tyres
G 01
43 38
For information on the function of the parts, see preceding illustration.
1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture repair kit.
2. Detach the label for maximum permitted speed and affix it to the steering wheel.
WARNING
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the case of contact with skin, wash away the fluid with soap and water.
3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and locate the cable and the air hose.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The seal is broken automatically when the bottle is screwed in.
4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the bottle's stopper.
5. Screw the bottle into its holder.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw in the air hose valve connection to the bot- tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and start the car.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.
8. Flick the switch to position I.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the com- pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum
06 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
06
244 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum 3.5 bar. (Release air with the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.
11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the cable from the 12 V socket.
12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit the valve cap.
13. As soon as possible, drive approximately 3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
Rechecking the repair and pressure
1. Reconnect the equipment.
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure gauge.
If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insufficiently sealed. The journey should not be continued. Contact a tyre centre.
If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar, the tyre must be inflated to the pres- sure specified in accordance with the
tyre pressure table, see page 297 (1 bar=100 kPa). Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres- sure is too high.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
3. Make sure the compressor is switched off. Detach the air hose and cable. Refit the dust cap.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that this replacement is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that you drive to the near- est authorised Volvo workshop for the replace- ment/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
Inflating the tyres
The car's original tyres can be inflated by the compressor.
1. The compressor must be switched off. Make sure that the switch is in position 0 and locate the cable and air hose.
2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw in the air hose valve connection to the bot- tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in danger to life. Never leave the engine run- ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf- ficient ventilation.
06 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.
3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V sockets and start the car.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure table, see page 297. (Release air using the pres- sure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)
6. Detach the air hose and cable.
7. Refit the dust cap.
Replacing the sealing fluid canister
Replace the bottle when the expiration date has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ- mentally hazardous waste.
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
246
Engine compartment............................................................................. 248 Lamps................................................................................................... 255 Wiper blades and washer fluid.............................................................. 262 Battery................................................................................................... 264 Fuses..................................................................................................... 267 Car care................................................................................................ 275
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
07 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
07
248
General
Volvo service programme
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi- ble, follow the Volvo service programme as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service and maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel, special tools and service literature to guarantee the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Check regularly
Check the following oils and fluids at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling:
Coolant
Engine oil
Power steering fluid
Washer fluid
WARNING
Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start automatically some time after the engine has been switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
Raising the car
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question. If a jack other than one recommended by Volvo is selected, then follow the instructions included with the equipment
If the car is raised with a workshop jack; posi- tion the jack against the front edge on the engine's subframe.
Do not damage the splashguard under the engine. Ensure that the workshop jack is posi- tioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack. Always use axle stands or similar.
If you raise the car using a two-pillar workshop lift, ensure that the front and rear lift arms are fixed under the lifting points on the door sill. See preceding illustration.
Opening and closing the bonnet
07 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
07
249
G 01
09 51
Pull the handle by the pedals. You will hear when the catch releases.
Move the catch to the left and open the bonnet. (The catch hook is located between the headlamp and grille, see illus- tration.)
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed.
Engine compartment, overview
G 01
89 45
The appearance of the engine compartment may vary depending on engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Power steering fluid reservoir
Engine oil dipstick
Radiator
Filler opening for engine oil
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive)
Battery
Relay and fuse box, engine compartment
Filling washer fluid
Air filter
WARNING
High voltage from the ignition system. The voltage in the ignition system is highly dan- gerous. The remote control key must always be in 0 position when work is being done in the engine compartment, see page 69.
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil when the remote control key is in II position or when the engine is hot.
Checking the engine oil
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
When driving under adverse conditions, see page 289.
07 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
07
250
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of low oil level or low oil pressure. Certain variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the lamp for oil pressure is used. Other variants have an oil level sensor, and then the driver is informed via the warning symbol in the centre of the instrument unit as well as by display texts. Cer- tain models have both variants. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
Filling and dipstick
G 02
17 34
Dipstick and filler pipe, petrol engine.
G 02
17 36
Dipstick1 and filler pipe, diesel engine.
Change the engine oil in accordance with the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
IMPORTANT
When filling oil to top up, the oil being filled must have the same grade, see page 290.
Checking the oil level in a new car is especially important before the first scheduled oil change.
The most accurate measurements are made on a cold engine before starting. The measure- ment will be inaccurate if taken immediately after the engine is switched off. The dipstick will indicate that the level is too low because the oil has not had time to flow down into the oil sump.
1 Diesel engines have an electronic dipstick.
07 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
07
251
G 02
17 37
The oil level must be within the area marked on the dipstick.
Park the car on a level surface, switch off the engine and wait 10-15 minutes to allow the oil time to run back to the sump. For capacities, see page 290 and onwards.
Checking with a cold engine
1. Wipe the dipstick clean.
2. Check the level using the dipstick. It must be between the MIN and MAX marks.
3. If the level is close to the MIN mark, start by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up until the level is nearer to MAX than MIN
on the dipstick.
IMPORTANT
Never fill above the MAX mark. Oil con- sumption may increase if too much oil is poured into the engine.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.
Checking with a warm engine
1. Park the car on a level surface, switch off the engine and wait 10 - 15 minutes to allow the oil time to run back to the sump.
2. Wipe the dipstick clean.
3. Check the oil level using the dipstick.
4. If the level is close to the MIN mark, start by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up until the level is nearer to MAX than MIN
on the dipstick.
For engines with electronic dipstick2
The oil level is checked using the electronic oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the engine is switched off, see page 126.
Checking the oil level:
1. Switch the ignition to key position II, see page 101.
2. Turn the thumbwheel to position Engine
oil level Wait.... > The oil level in the engine is then shown.
NOTE
The oil level is only updated by the system during driving. The system cannot detect changes when oil is filled or drained.
If engine oil is filled or drained then the car must be driven about 30 km before the oil level is measured correctly.
Message
Engine oil level OK All normal.
Engine oil level
Wait...
System initialised, shown for about 2 seconds.
2 Only applies to diesel.
07 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
07
252
Message
Engine oil level Fill
1 litre oil
Fill with engine oil
Engine oil level
Service required
Shown when the system has detected something that needs to be rec- tified in order to ena- ble the correct infor- mation regarding oil volume to be shown.
Coolant
Checking and topping up the coolant
When topping up the coolant, follow the instructions on the packaging. It is important that the mixture of coolant concentrate and water is correct for the prevailing weather con- ditions. Never top up with water only. The risk of freezing increases with both too little and too much coolant concentrate. For capacities, see page 291.
IMPORTANT
A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo.
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% water and 50% coolant.
Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo rec- ommendations.
When changing coolant/replacing cool- ing system components, flush the cool- ing system clean with approved quality tap water or flush with ready-mixed coolant.
The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. High tempera- tures may occur, causing a risk of dam- age (cracks) to the cylinder head.
For capacities and for standards regarding water quality, see page 291.
Check the coolant regularly
The level must lie between the MIN and MAX
marks on the expansion tank. If the system is
07 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
07
253
not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could occur, causing a risk of damage to the engine.
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature, unscrew the expan- sion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure.
Brake and clutch fluid
Checking the level
Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser- voir. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir. Check the level regularly.
Change the brake fluid every other year or at every other regular service.
For capacities and recommended fluid grade, see page 291. The fluid should be changed annually on cars driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent braking, such as driving in mountains or tropical climates with high humidity.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid. Volvo rec- ommends that the reason for the loss of brake fluid is investigated by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Filling
The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side.
The fluid reservoir is protected under the cover over the cold section in the engine compart- ment. The round cover must be removed first before the reservoir cap can be reached.
1. Turn and open the cover located on the covering.
2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks, which are located on the inside of the reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Do not forget to refit the cap.
Power steering fluid
IMPORTANT
Keep the area around the power steering fluid reservoir clean when checking. The cover must not be opened.
Check the level frequently. The fluid does not require changing. The fluid level must be
07 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
07
254
between the MIN and MAX marks. For capaci- ties and recommended fluid grade, see page 291.
NOTE
If a fault should arise in the power steering system or if the engine is switched off and the car must be towed, it can still be steered.
07 Maintenance and service
Lamps
07
255
General
For bulb specification, see page 260. Bulbs and spotlights that are of a special type or that are only suitable for replacement by a work- shop are:
General interior lighting in the roof
Reading lamps
Glovebox lighting
Courtesy lighting
Direction indicators, door mirror
Approach lighting, door mirror
Brake light
Xenon, Active Xenon and LED lamps
WARNING
On cars equipped with Xenon lamps, head- lamp replacement must be performed at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The lamp must be han- dled with extreme caution because it is equipped with a high voltage unit.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease and oils from your fin- gers are vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.
Headlamps front
G 01 03 25
All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the engine compartment. Loosen and remove the whole headlamp.
WARNING
Always switch off the ignition and remove the remote control key before starting to replace a bulb.
Removing the headlamp
1. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button quickly.
2. (Upper illustration)
Pull out the headlamp's locking pins.
Pull the headlamp straight forward.
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con- nector.
3. (Lower illustration)
Detach the headlamp connector by pressing down the clip with your thumb.
At the same time, guide out the con- nector with your other hand.
4. Lift out the headlamp and place it on a soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.
5. Replace the bulb in question, .
Installing the headlamp
1. Plug in the connector. A clicking sound should be heard.
2. Reinstall the headlamp and locking pins. Check that they are correctly inserted.
3. Check the lighting.
07 Maintenance and service
Lamps
07
256
The headlamp must be mounted and the con- nector correctly installed before the lighting is switched on or the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch.
Removing the cover
G 02
17 45
Before starting to replace a bulb, see page 255.
1. Open the lock clamp by pressing up/out.
2. Press down the clips on the cover and remove it.
Reinstall the cover in reverse order.
Dipped beam, halogen
G 02
17 46
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 255.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
4. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder downwards.
5. Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out.
6. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it in. It can be secured in one position.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Main beam, Halogen
G 02
17 47
1. Detach the headlamp.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise and then pulling straight out
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It can be secured in one position.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
07 Maintenance and service
Lamps
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 257
Extra main beam, Xenon*
G 02
17 48
1. Detach the headlamp.
2. Remove the cover, see page 256.
3. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder downwards.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it in. It can only be secured in one position.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Position/parking lamps
G 02
17 49
1. Detach the headlamp.
2. Remove the cover, see page 256.
3. For better access, detach the main beam bulb first.
4. Pull the cable in order to withdraw the bulb holder.
5. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one. It can only be secured in one position.
6. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and press until a clicking sound is heard.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Direction indicators/flashers
G 02
17 50
1. Detach the headlamp.
2. Remove the small round cover.
3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the bulb.
4. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one. It can only be installed in one way.
5. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and press until a clicking sound is heard.
6. Refit the cover. It must be fitted and pressed in until a clicking sound is heard.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
07 Maintenance and service
Lamps
07
258
Side marker lamps
G 02
17 51
Before starting to replace a bulb, see page 255.
1. Detach the headlamp.
2. Remove the small round cover.
3. Pull the cable in order to withdraw the bulb holder.
4. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one. It can only be installed in one way.
5. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and press until a clicking sound is heard.
6. Refit the cover. It must be fitted and pressed in until a clicking sound is heard.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Front fog lamps
G 02
17 53
1. Remove the cover by pressing in the 4 clips with a thin blade and pulling straight out.
2. Unscrew the lamp housing screw and pull it out.
3. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and remove it.
4. Fit a new bulb by turning clockwise.
5. Refit the bulb. (The profile of the bulb holder corresponds to the profile of the foot of the bulb).
6. Refit the bulb holder. The TOP mark on the bulb holder must always be upward.
Lamp housing, rear
G 02
17 54
The bulbs in the rear light cluster are replaced from inside the cargo area (not the LED lamps).
1. Remove the covers in the left/right-hand panel to access the bulbs. The bulbs are located in separate bulb holders.
2. Press the catches together and pull out the bulb holder.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Plug in the connector.
5. Press the bulb holder into place and refit the cover.
07 Maintenance and service
Lamps
07
259
NOTE
If an error message remains after the broken bulb has been replaced then we recom- mend that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop.
Location of rear bulbs
G 02
17 55
Lamp lens, right-hand side
Position/parking lights (LED)
Direction indicators
Side position lights, SML (LED)
Brake light
Rear fog lamp (one side)
Reversing lamp G
01 54
18
Rear lamp bulb holder
Direction indicators
Brake light
Rear fog lamp (one side)
Reversing lamp
Number plate lighting
G 02
17 56
1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
2. Carefully detach the whole lamp housing and withdraw it.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Refit the whole lamp housing and screw it into place.
07 Maintenance and service
Lamps
07
260
Lighting, cargo area
G 02
17 58
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so that the lamp housing comes loose.
2. Replace the bulb.
3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press back the lamp housing.
Vanity mirror lighting
Removing the mirror glass
G 02
17 59
1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower edge, in the centre. Carefully prize up the lug on the edge.
2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edge on the left and right-hand sides (by the black rubber sections), and prize carefully so that the glass comes loose in the lower edge.
3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entire mirror glass and cover.
4. Replace the bulb.
Fitting the mirror glass
1. Press the three lugs at top edge of the mir- ror glass back into position.
2. Then press the three lower lugs back into position.
Specification, bulbs
Lighting W Type
Extra main beam, Xenon, ABL
55 H7
Dipped beam, hal- ogen
55 H7
Main beam, Halo- gen
65 H9
Brake light 21 P21W
Reversing lamp 21 P21W
Rear fog lamp 21 P21W
Front direction indicators
21 H21W
Direction indica- tors, rear/
21 PY21W
Front fog lamps 35 H8
Cargo area light- ing, number plate lighting
5 Tubular lamp SV8.5
Vanity mirror 1.2 W2x4.6D
07 Maintenance and service
Lamps
07
261
Lighting W Type
Front position and parking lamps
5 W5W
Front side marker lamps
5 W5W
Glovebox lighting 5 Tubular lamp SV8.5
07 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades and washer fluid
07
262
Wiper blades
Service position
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades (for scraping off ice from the windscreen) they must be in service position.
1. Turn the remote control key to key position 0, see page 69, and keep the remote con- trol key in the ignition switch.
2. Move the right-hand stalk switch up for about 1 second. The wipers then move to standing straight up.
The wipers return to the starting position when the car is started.
Replacing the wiper blades Lift up the wiper arm. Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" is heard.
Check that the blade is firmly installed.
G 02
17 63
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than the blade on the passenger side.
Cleaning
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see page 275 and onwards.
07 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades and washer fluid
07
263
IMPORTANT
Check the wiper blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the serv- ice life of the wiper blades.
Filling washer fluid
The windscreen and headlamp washers share a common reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Add washer antifreeze during the winter so that the fluid does not freeze in the pump, reservoir and hoses.
For capacities, see page 291.
07 Maintenance and service
Battery
07
264
Warning symbols on the battery
Use protective goggles.
Further information in the owner's manual.
Store the battery out of the reach of children.
The battery contains cor- rosive acid.
Avoid sparks and naked flames.
Risk of explosion.
NOTE
An expended battery must be recycled in an environmentally responsible manner - it contains lead.
Operation
Check that the cables to the battery are correctly connected and properly tight- ened.
Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running.
The service life and function of the battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts, discharging, driving style, driving con- ditions, climatic conditions etc.
IMPORTANT
Never use a quick charger to charge the battery.
WARNING
Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which can be generated if the jump leads are con- nected incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery explode. The battery contains sul- phuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quan- tities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical attention immediately.
07 Maintenance and service
Battery
07
265
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several factors, including driving conditions and cli- mate. Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances. Extreme cold further limits star- ting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition, at least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom- mended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic trickle charging.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life.
Changing
Removal
Switch off the ignition and wait for 5 minutes.
Open the clips on the front cover and remove the cover.
Release the rubber moulding so that the rear cover is free.
Remove the rear cover by screwing one quarter turn and lifting it away.
07 Maintenance and service
Battery
07
266
WARNING
Connect and disconnect the positive and negative cables in the correct sequence.
Detach the black negative cable
Detach the red positive cable
Detach the ventilation hose from the bat- tery
Loosen the screw holding the battery clamp.
Move the battery to the side and lift it up.
Installation
1. Lower the battery into the battery box.
2. Move the battery inward and to the side until it reaches the rear edge of the box.
3. Secure the battery using the battery clamp.
4. Connect the ventilation hose.
5. Connect the red positive cable.
6. Connect the black negative cable.
7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal).
8. Reinstall the rubber moulding. (See Removal).
9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with the clips. (See Removal).
07 Maintenance and service
Fuses
07
267
General
All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to pro- tect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading.
If an electrical component or function does not work, it may be because the component's fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for checking.
Changing
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause signifi- cant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.
Location, fuse boxes
In a right-hand drive car the fuse boxes under the glovebox change sides.
, Under the glovebox
By the right-hand side panel*
Cargo area
Engine compartment
07 Maintenance and service
Fuses
07
268
Engine compartment
07 Maintenance and service
Fuses
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 269
General fuses, engine compartment
On the inside of the cover are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fit- ting of fuses.
Positions (see preceding illustration)
Engine compartment, upper
Engine compartment, front
Engine compartment, lower
These fuses are all located in the engine com- partment box. Fuses in are located under
.
Fuses 1-7 and 42-44 are of the "Midi Fuse" type and must only be replaced by a work- shop. Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.
8-15 and 34 are of the "JCASE" type and the recommendation for changing is that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop.
16 33 and 35 41 are of the "MiniFuse" type.
Fuse box locations in a left-hand drive car. In a right-hand drive car the fuse box under the glo- vebox changes sides.
Function A
Primary fuse CEM KL30B 50
Primary fuse CEM KL30A 50
Primary fuse RJBA KL30 60
Primary fuse CJB KL30 60
Primary fuse CJB 15E KL30
60
- -
PTC Air preheater* 100
Headlamp washers* 20
Windscreen wipers 30
Parking heater* 25
Ventilation fan 40
- -
ABS pump 40
ABS valves 20
- -
Function A
Headlamp levelling* (Xenon, Active Xenon)
10
Primary fuse CEM 20
ABS 15-feed 5
Speed related power steering*
5
Engine Control Module (ECM), transm. SRS
10
Heated washer nozzles* 10
Vacuum pump 5-cyl Petrol Turbo and GTDI
Electro-hydraulic power steering 1.6 DRIVe
5
Lighting panel 5
- -
- -
- -
Relay, engine compart- ment box
5
07 Maintenance and service
Fuses
07
270 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Function A
Auxiliary lamps* 20
Horn 15
Engine Control Module (ECM)
10
Control module, auto- matic gearbox*
15
Compressor A/C 15
Relay coils 5
Starter motor relay 30
Ignition coils 4-cyl. petrol, Glow control module
10
Ignition coils 5, 6-cyl. pet- rol
20
Ignition coils 8-cyl. petrol 20
EGR, TCV (2.0D)
HP Fuel pump (1.6D)
10
Function A
Engine control module, Throttle petrol
10
Engine control module, Throttle diesel
15
15 Injection system (4, 5, 6, 8- cyl. petrol) Mass air flow sensor (5, 6, 8-cyl. petrol), ECM (6-cyl.)
Mass air flow sensor, valves (5-cyl diesel)
Mass air flow sensor, engine control module, throttle (1.6D)
Mass air flow sensor (2.0D)
15
Engine valves 10
EVAP, Lambda-sond, Injection (petrol)
15
Lambda-sond (4-cyl. pet- rol, 5-cyl. diesel)
10
Function A
Water pump (V8) 10
Vacuum pump, crankcase valve (5-cyl. turbo, 2.0 GTDI)
Diesel filter heater
20
Crankcase ventilation heater (5-cyl. diesel)
5
Glow plugs (4-cyl. diesel) 60
Glow plugs (5-cyl. diesel) 70
Cooling fan (4 - 5-cyl. pet- rol)
60
Cooling fan (6-cyl. petrol), (5-cyl. diesel)
80
Cooling fan, (8-cyl. petrol) 80
Electro-hydraulic power steering (1.6D)
80
Electro-hydraulic power steering (other)
100
07 Maintenance and service
Fuses
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 271
Under the glovebox
Positions
Box A
Function A
Primary fuse, control module, audio
Bass speaker
40
- -
- -
- -
Box A
Function A
- -
- -
12 V socket, cargo area 15
Control panel, driver's door
20
Control panel, front pas- senger door
20
Box A
Function A
Control panel, rear pas- senger door, right
20
Control panel, rear pas- senger door, left
20
Keyless* 20
Power seat driver's side* 20
07 Maintenance and service
Fuses
07
272 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Box A
Function A
Power seat passenger side*
20
Folding head restraint* 15
- -
Radio, Display, RTI* 10
Infotainment system 15
Telephone, BluetoothTM* 5
- -
Sun roof*, interior lighting roof, climate sensor
5
Cigarette lighter
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*
15
Seat heating (passenger side)
15
Seat heating (driver's side) 15
Box A
Function A
- -
Massage seat front*, arm- rest lighting* and refriger- ator *
10
Seat heating, rear passen- ger side* right
15
Seat heating, rear passen- ger side* left
15
Parking assistance*
Parking camera*
RTI*
5
Control module AWD* 10
Active chassis Four-C* 10
Box B
Function A
- -
- -
Box B
Function A
Interior lighting, Power driver's seat*
7,5
Information display (DIM) 5
Adaptive cruise control, ACC*, collision warning system *
10
Interior lighting, Rain sen- sor
7,5
Steering wheel module 7,5
Central locking system rear, fuel filler flap
10
Washers 15
Windscreen washers 15
Opening boot lid 10
Lock boot lid 10
Fuel pump 20
Remote control key receiver, Alarm*, Climate
5
07 Maintenance and service
Fuses
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 273
Box B
Function A
Steering lock 15
Alarm/OBDII 5
- -
Airbag 10
Collision warning system, radar front
5
Accelerator pedal, electric engine block heater (die- sel), power door mirrors*, seat heating, rear *
7,5
Infotainment (ICM), CD & RadioA
15
Brake light 5
Sun roof* 20
Immobiliser 5
A Not Premium or High Performance.
In centre console - Executive*
The fuse box is located behind the right-hand panel on the passenger side.
NOTE
For any fuse replacement the recommen- dation is that the car is taken into an author- ised Volvo workshop.
Function A
Analogue clock 5
07 Maintenance and service
Fuses
07
274 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Cargo area
The fuse box is located behind the upholstery on the left-hand side.
Positions
Rear fuse box A
Electric parking brake, left 30
Electric parking brake, right 30
Rear window defroster 30
Trailer socket 2* 15
- -
- -
Rear fuse box A
- -
- -
- -
- -
Trailer socket 1* 40
- -
07 Maintenance and service
Car care
07
275
Washing the car
Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo.
Remove bird droppings from the paintwork as soon as possible. Bird droppings con- tain chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork very quickly. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended for the removal of any discoloration.
Hose down the underbody.
Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt. Do not spray directly onto the locks.
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water.
Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.
Use cold degreasing agent on very dirty surfaces.
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functional- ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for example.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when it has been switched on for a time.
Cleaning the wiper blades
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair the service life of wiper blades.
For cleaning:
Set the wiper blades in service position, see page 262.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg- ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.
Do not use any strong solvents.
Automatic car washes
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way of washing the car, but it cannot reach everywhere. Handwashing the car is recom- mended for achieving optimum results.
NOTE
During the first few months a new car must only be handwashed. This is because the paintwork is more sensitive when it is new.
High-pressure washing
When using high-pressure washing, use sweeping movements and make sure that the nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface of the car (the distance applies to all exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto the locks.
Testing the brakes
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the car, including the parking brake, to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking per- formance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then when driving long distances in rain or slush. The heat from the friction causes the brake lin-
07 Maintenance and service
Car care
07
276 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
ings to warm up and dry. Do the same thing after starting in very damp or cold weather.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended for the cleaning and care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim components, such as glossy trim mouldings. When using such a cleaning agent the instruc- tions must be followed carefully.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rub- ber, only rub with light pressure if it is nec- essary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.
Rims
Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the surface and cause stains on chrome-plated aluminium rims.
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or to give the paintwork extra protection.
The car does not need to be polished until it is at least one year old. However, the car can be waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax the car in direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed using fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq- uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the packaging carefully. Many preparations con- tain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo should be used. Other treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paint- work. Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo war- ranty.
Water-repellent coating*
Never use products such as car wax, degreaser or similar on glass surfa-
ces as this could ruin their water-repellent properties.
Take care when cleaning so as not to damage the glass surface.
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when removing ice only use plastic ice scrapers.
There is natural wear of the water-repellent coating.
Treatment with a special finishing agent avail- able from Volvo dealers is recommended in order to maintain the water-repellent proper- ties. This should be used first after three years and then each year.
Rustproofing inspection and maintenance
The car received a thorough and complete rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body are made of galvanised sheet metal. The underbody is protected by a wear-resistant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the exposed members, cavities, closed sections and side doors.
07 Maintenance and service
Car care
07
277
Under normal conditions the rustproofing does not require treatment for approximately 12 years. After this period, it should be treated at three-year intervals. Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop for assistance if the car needs further treatment.
Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it is important to keep the car clean. The car's rust- proofing needs to be checked regularly and touched-up if necessary in order for it to be maintained.
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and follow the instructions included with the car care product.
Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents.
Volvo's cleaning agents can also be used for stains on the mat, after vacuuming.
Stains on fabric upholstery and roof
upholstery
A special fabric cleaning agent, available from authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of the upholstery. Use water and a synthetic
detergent to clean the seatbelts. Make sure the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery.
Treating stains on leather upholstery
Volvo's leather upholstery is chromium-free and approved in accordance with the Oeko- Tex 100 standard and is treated to preserve its original appearance.
Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau- tiful patina over time. The leather is refined and processed so that it retains its natural charac- teristics. It is given a protective coating, but regular cleaning is required in order to maintain both characteristics and appearance. Volvo offers a comprehensive product for the clean- ing and treatment of leather upholstery which, when used in accordance with the instructions, preserves the leather's protective coating. After a period of use the natural appearance of the leather will nevertheless emerge, depend- ing more or less on the surface texture of the leather. This is a natural maturing of the leather and shows that it is a natural product.
To achieve best results Volvo recommends cleaning and the application of protective
cream once to four times per year (or more if necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is avail- able from your Volvo dealer.
IMPORTANT
Certain items of coloured clothing (for example, jeans and suede garments) may stain the upholstery.
Never use strong solvents. Such prod- ucts may damage fabric, vinyl and leather upholstery.
Washing instructions for leather
upholstery
1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular movements.
3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the stain. Do not rub.
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and allow the leather to dry completely.
Protective treatment of leather
upholstery
1. Pour a small amount of the protective cream on the felted cloth and massage in
07 Maintenance and service
Car care
07
278
a thin layer of cream with gentle circular movements on the leather.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes before use.
The leather has now been given improved pro- tection against stains and improved UV pro- tection.
Washing instructions for the leather
steering wheel
Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre-mois- tened sponge and neutral soap.
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the leather steering wheel with protective plas- tic.
Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care agents are recommended for best results.
If the steering wheel has stains:
Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and blood)
Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5% ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use a solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)
Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)
1. Same procedure as group I.
2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.
Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)
1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.
2. Same procedure as group I.
Treating stains on interior plastic, metal
and wood parts
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly moistened with water, available from Volvo dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior parts and surfaces.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong stain removers. A special cleaning agent avail- able from Volvo dealers can be used for more difficult cleaning.
Carpets and cargo area
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.
Touching up minor paintwork damage
Paint is an important part of the car's rust- proofing and should therefore be checked reg- ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately. The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the edges of wings and doors.
Materials
primer in a can
spray can or touch-up pen1
masking tape
Colour code
Car colour code
1 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen.
07 Maintenance and service
Car care
07
279
It is important that the correct colour is used. For product decal location, see page 282.
Repairing stone chips
G 02
18 32
Before work is begun, the car must be clean and dry and at a temperature above 15 C.
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the damaged surface. Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint.
2. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush or a matchstick. Apply paint using a brush once the primer is dry.
3. For scratches, proceed as above, but mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork.
4. After a few days, polish the touched-up areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount of lapping paste.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated to the bare metal and there is an undamaged col- our coat, you can paint straight after clean- ing the damaged surface.
280
Type designations................................................................................. 282 Dimensions and weights....................................................................... 284 Engine specifications............................................................................ 288 Engine oil............................................................................................... 289 Fluids and lubricants............................................................................. 291 Fuel....................................................................................................... 293 Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure ......................................... 296 Electrical system................................................................................... 300 Type approval....................................................................................... 301 Symbols in the display.......................................................................... 302
SPECIF ICATIONS
08 Specifications
Type designations
08
282
Label location
08 Specifications
Type designations
08
283
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle identification and engine numbers can facili- tate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer regarding the car and when ordering spare parts and accessories.
Type designation, vehicle identification number, maximum permissible weights, codes for colour and upholstery and type approval number. The label is visible when the right rear door is opened.
Label for parking heater.
Engine code, component and serial num- bers.
The engine oil label specifies oil grade and viscosity.
Gearbox type designation and serial num- ber.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle Identification Number)
Further information on the car is presented in the registration document.
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual are not provided as exact reproductions of those in the car. The purpose is to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your car in particular is available on the label in question in your car.
08 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
08
284
Dimensions
Dimensions mm
A Wheelbase 2835
B Length 4851
C Load length, floor, folded seat
1927
D Load length, floor 1094
E Height 1493
F Load height 368
G Front track 1588
Dimensions mm
H Rear track 1585
I Load width, floor 1130
J Width 1861
K Width including door mirrors
2106
Weights
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank 90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories, and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, see table page 286) influences the payload and is not included in the kerb weight.
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight - Kerb weight.
08 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
08
285
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version - i.e. a car with- out extra equipment or accessories. This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced cor- respondingly by the weight of the acces- sory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load- ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/ Summum equipment levels, as well as other accessories such as Towbar, Load carriers, Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps, GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Car- pets, Cargo cover, Power seats, etc.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- taining the kerb weight of your own partic- ular car.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.
For information on decal location, see page 282.
Max. gross vehicle weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 100 kg.
08 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
08
286
Towing capacity and towball load
Engine Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
2.0F Automatic, MPS6 1000 50
All All (except 2.0F with Automatic, MPS6) 1200 50
2.0 Manual, MTX75 1320 75
2.0F Manual, MTX75 1320 75
2.5FT Manual, M66 1600 75
2.5FT Automatic, TF-80SC 1800 90
2.5T Manual, M66 1600 75
2.5T Automatic, TF-80SC 1800 90
3.2 AWD Automatic, TF-80SC 1800 90
T6 AWD Automatic, TF-80SC 2000 90
V8A Automatic, TF-80SC 2000 90
D3 Manual, M66 1600 75
D3 Automatic, TF-80SC 1600 90
D5 Manual, M66 1600 75
D5 Automatic, TF-80SC
Automatic, TF80SC AWD
2000 90
A Certain markets
08 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
08
287
Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
750 50
NOTE
The use of a stabiliser hitch on the towing bracket is recommended for trailers heavier than 1800 kg.
08 Specifications
Engine specifications
08
288
Engine specifications
Model Engine code
Output (kW/ rpm)
Output (hp/rpm)
Torque (Nm/ rpm)
No. of cylin- ders
Bore (mm)
Stroke (mm)
Swept vol- ume (litres)
Compres- sion ratio
2.0 B4204S3 107/6000 145/6000 190/4500 4 87 83.0 1.999 10.8:1
2.0F B4204S4 107/6000 145/6000 190/4500 4 87 83.0 1.999 10.8:1
2.5FT B5254T8A 147/4800 200/4800 300/15004500 5 83 93.2 2.521 9.0:1
2.5FT B5254T11 170/4800 231/4800 340/17004800 5 83 93.2 2.521 9.0:1
2.0T B4204T6 149/6000 203/6000 300/17504000 4 88 83.1 1.999 10.0:1
2.5T B5254T10 170/4800 231/4800 340/17004800 5 83 93.2 2.521 9.0:1
3.2 B6324S5 185/6200 245/6200 320/3200 6 84 96.0 3.192 10.8:1
T6 B6304T4 210/5600 304/5600 440/15004800 6 82 93.2 2.953 9.3:1
V8A B8444S 232/5950 315/5950 440/3950 8 94 79.5 4.414 10.4:1
2.0D D4204T 100/4000 136/4000 320/2000 4 85 88.0 1.997 18.5:1
D3 D5204T2 120/3000 163/3000 400/14002850 5 81 77.0 1.984 16.5:1
D5 D5244T10 151/4000 205/4000 420/15003250 5 81 93.2 2.400 16.5:1
A Certain markets
08 Specifications
Engine oil
08
289
Adverse driving conditions
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor- mally high oil temperature or oil consumption. Below are some examples of adverse driving conditions.
Check the oil level more frequently for long journeys:
towing a caravan or trailer
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 C or hot- ter than +40 C
The above also apply to shorter driving dis- tances at low temperatures.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions. It provides extra protection for the engine.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.
Viscosity chart
08 Specifications
Engine oil
08
290
Engine oil grade
Engine variant Engine code Volume between
MIN and MAX (litres)
Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
2.5FT B5254T8A Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 0W30
1.3 5.5
2.5FT B5254T11 1.3 5.5
2.5 B5254T10 1.3 5.5
3.2 B6324S5 1.2 6.8
T6 B6304T4 1.2 6.8
V8 B8444SA 1.1 7.0
D3 D5204T2 1.0 5.9
D5 D5244T10 1.0 5.9
2.0 B4204S3 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 5W30
When driving under adverse condi- tions, use ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.
0,8 4.3
2.0F B4204S4 0,8 4.3
2.0T B4204T6 0.6 4,1
1.6D D4164T 1.0 3.8
A Certain markets
08 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
08
291
Other fluids and lubricants
Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
MMT6 1.7
BOT 350M3MTX75 1.8
M66 1.9
Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
MPS6 7.3 BOT 341
TF-80SC 7.0
Fluid System Volume (litres) Prescribed grade
Coolant 2.0, 2.0F 7.8
Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed with 50% waterA, see the packaging.
2.0T, 2.5, 2.5FT, 3.2 and T6 8.9
V8 11.9
D3 and D5 8.9
Brake fluid Brake system 0.6 DOT 4+
Power steering fluid Power steering WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent prod- uct.
Washer fluid Cars with headlamp washing 6.5 Use a washer antifreeze recommended by Volvo, mixed with water.Cars without headlamp washing 4.5
08 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
08
292
Fluid System Volume (litres) Prescribed grade
Fuel Petrol engine approx. 70 Petrol: see page 216
Diesel engine approx. 70 Diesel: see page 217
A Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
NOTE
Under normal driving conditions, the gear- box oil does not need to be changed during its service life. However, this may be nec- essary under adverse driving conditions, see page 291.
08 Specifications
Fuel
08
293
CO2 emissions and fuel consumption
A B C
2.0 273 11,4 156 6.5 199 8.3
2.0FA 273 11,4 156 6.5 199 8.3
2.0FA 271 11.5 164 6.9 203 8.5
2.0T 256 11,0 142 6.1 184 7.9
2.0T 265 11,4 152 6.5 193 8.3
2.5T 299 12.5 151 6.3 206 8.6
2.5T 338 14.2 165 6.9 229 9.6
2.5FTA 299 12.5 151 6.3 206 8.6
2.5FTA 338 14.2 165 6.9 229 9.6
3,2 305 13,1 153 6.6 208 8.9
08 Specifications
Fuel
08
294
A B C
3,2 AWD 319 13,7 163 7.0 219 9,4
T6 AWD 337 14,5 170 7.3 231 9.9
V8 AWD 422 18,0 204 8.7 284 12.1
D3 185 7.1 112 4.3 139 5.3
D3 205 7.8 124 4,7 154 5.9
D5 178 6.7 116 4,4 139 5.3
D5 233 8.8 128 4.9 166 6.3
D5 AWD 254 9.6 145 5.5 184 7.0
A A Flexifuel vehicle can be driven on any 95 octane unleaded petrol, or bioethanol E85, as well as all possible mixtures of these two fuels. The car consumes 30-40% more E85 which has a lower energy content. The precise difference depends on driving style, ambient temperature and variations in fuel specification amongst other things.
A = urban driving (l/100 km)
B = driving on main roads (l/100 km)
C = combined driving (l/100km)
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide
Fuel consumption and emission values in the table above are based on specific EU cycles1,
that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic version and without extra equipment. The car's weight may increase depending on equipment. This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded,
08 Specifications
Fuel
08
295
increases fuel consumption and carbon diox- ide emissions.
There are several reasons for increased fuel consumption compared with the table's val- ues. Examples of this are:
The driver's driving style.
If the customer has specified wheels larger than those fitted as standard on the mod- el's basic version, then resistance increa- ses.
High speed results in increased wind resis- tance.
Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions, weather and the condition of the car.
Even a combination of the above-mentioned examples can result in significantly improved consumption. For further information, please refer to the regulations referred to 1.
Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise in a comparison with the EU driving cycles1
which are used in the certification of the car and on which the consumption figures in the table are based.
To bear in mind
Tips that the driver can use in order to reduce consumption:
Drive gently and avoid unnecessary accel- eration as well as braking too hard.
Drive with the correct air pressure in the tyres and check this regularly - select ECO tyre pressure for best results, see the tyre pressure table on page 240.
Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump- tion - seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer.
See further information and more advice on pages 12 and 212.
See page 216 for general information on fuel.
1 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU Regulation no 682/2008 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for city driving and driving on main roads. - City driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the engine. The driving is simulated. - Driving on main roads - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - Cars with the D5 engine and 6-speed manual transmission are started in 2nd gear under normal conditions. The value for combined driving, which is reported in the table, is a combination of city driving and driving on main roads, in accordance with legal requirements. CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.
08 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
08
296
Approved dimensions
In certain countries not all approved dimen- sions are indicated by the registration docu- ment or other documents. The table below
shows all approved combinations of wheel rims and tyres, and the lowest permitted load index (LI) and speed rating (SS). Information on engine, front-wheel drive (FWD) or all-wheel
drive (AWD) and the type of transmission is needed to read the table. For information with respect to these details, see page 282.
Engine FWD/
AWD
man/
aut
LI SS 205/60R16
7Jx16x50
225/55R16
7Jx16x50
225/50R17
7Jx17x50
7.5Jx17x55
245/45R17
8Jx17x55
245/40R18
8Jx18x55
V8 B8444S AWD aut 97 W - -
T6 B6304T4 AWD aut 95 W -
3.2 B6324S5 FWD aut 94 W -
3.2 B6324S5 AWD aut 95 V -
D5 D5244T10 FWD man/aut 94 V -
D5 D5244T10 AWD aut 95 V -
D3 D5204T2 FWD man/aut 94 V
2.5T B5254T10 FWD man/aut 94 V
2.5T B5254T11 FWD man/aut 94 V - -
2.5FT B5254T8 FWD aut 94 V - -
2.0T B4204T6 FWD man/aut 92 V
2.0 B4204S3 FWD man/aut 92 H
08 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
08
297
Engine FWD/
AWD
man/
aut
LI SS 205/60R16
7Jx16x50
225/55R16
7Jx16x50
225/50R17
7Jx17x50
7.5Jx17x55
245/45R17
8Jx17x55
245/40R18
8Jx18x55
2.0F B4204S4 FWD man/aut 92 H
D2 D4164T FWD man 93 H
Approved tyre pressures
Variant Tyre size Speed
(km/h)
Load, 1-3 persons Max. load ECO pres-
sureA
front
(kPa)B
Rear
(kPa)
front
(kPa)
Rear
(kPa)
Front/rear
(kPa)
V8 225/50 R 17 0-160 240 220 260 260 260
160 + 300 300 310 310 -
245/45 R 17 0-160 220 210 260 260 260
160 + 280 280 300 300 -
245/40 R 18 0-160 240 220 260 260 260
160 + 270 270 290 290 -
08 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
08
298
Variant Tyre size Speed
(km/h)
Load, 1-3 persons Max. load ECO pres-
sureA
front
(kPa)B
Rear
(kPa)
front
(kPa)
Rear
(kPa)
Front/rear
(kPa)
3.2
T6
225/55 R 16
225/50 R 17
245/45 R 17
0-160 230 210 260 260 260
160 + 280 280 290 290 -
245/40 R 18 0-160 230 210 260 260 260
160 + 270 270 290 290 -
D5 225/55 R 16
225/50 R 17
245/45 R 17
0-160 220 210 260 260 260
160 + 260 260 270 270 -
245/40 R 18 0-160 230 210 260 260 260
160 + 260 260 270 270 -
08 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
08
299
Variant Tyre size Speed
(km/h)
Load, 1-3 persons Max. load ECO pres-
sureA
front
(kPa)B
Rear
(kPa)
front
(kPa)
Rear
(kPa)
Front/rear
(kPa)
2.0
2.0F
2.5
D2
D3
225/55 R 16
225/50 R 17
245/45 R 17
0-160 220 210 260 260 260
160 + 260 260 270 270 -
205/60 R 16
245/40 R 18
0-160 230 210 260 260 260
160 + 260 260 270 270 -
Temporary Spare Tyre max. 80 420 420 420 420 -
A Economical driving. B In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
08 Specifications
Electrical system
08
300
Electrical system
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator. The electrical system is single-pole and uses the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
The battery capacity is dependent upon the equipment level in the vehicle.
IMPORTANT
If the battery is replaced, replace it with a battery of the same cold start capacity and reserve capacity as the original (see the decal on the battery).
Battery
Voltage (V) Cold start capacity,
CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A)
Reserve capacity
(minutes)
12 520800 100160
12 520700 100135
12 600800 120160
12 700800 135160
08 Specifications
Type approval
08
301
Remote control system
Country
A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK, E, EST, F, FIN, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT, LV, M, NL, P, PL, S, SK, SLO
Delphi hereby certifies that this remote control key system conforms to the essential char- acteristic require- ments and other rel- evant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.
IS, LI, N, CH
HR
ROK Delphi 2003-07-15, Germany R- LPD1-03-0151
BR
RC
CCAB06LP1940T4
08 Specifications
Symbols in the display
08
302 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
There are a variety of different symbols in the display in the car. The symbols are divided into warning, indicator and information symbols. Shown below are the most common symbols with their meanings and a reference to where in the manual further information can be found. For more information on symbols and text messages, see pages 64, 65 and 126.
The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. At the same time an explanatory text is dis- played in the information display.
The yellow information symbol illumi- nates, in combination with text in the informa- tion display, when a deviation in any of the car's systems has occurred. The yellow symbol information can also illuminate in combination with other symbols.
Symbols in the display
Indicator and warning symbols in the
combined instrument panel
Sym- bol
Meaning Page
Low oil pressure 65
Parking brake 65, 114, 115
Airbags - SRS 19, 65
Seatbelt reminder 16, 65
Alternator not charg- ing
65
Fault in the brake system
65, 113
Warning, safety mode
19, 30, 65, 67
Indicator and information symbols in the
combined instrument panel
Sym- bol
Meaning Page
Fault in the ABL sys- tem*
64, 79
Emissions system 64
Fault in the ABS sys- tem
64, 113
Rear fog lamp on 64, 81
Stability system, DSTC
64, 161
Engine preheater (diesel)
64
Low level in fuel tank 64, 138
Information, read dis- play text
64
Main beam on 64, 79
08 Specifications
Symbols in the display
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 303
Sym- bol
Meaning Page
Left-hand direction indicators
64
Right-hand direction indicators
64
Other information symbols in the
combined instrument panel
Sym- bol
Meaning Page
Adaptive cruise con- trol*
164, 168, 172
Adaptive cruise con- trol*
172
Adaptive cruise con- trol*, Distance Alert*
172, 175
Adaptive cruise con- trol*, Distance Alert*
172, 175
Adaptive cruise con- trol*
172
Adaptive cruise con- trol*, Distance Alert*
168, 174
Sym- bol
Meaning Page
Adaptive cruise con- trol*, Distance Alert*
168, 174
Adaptive cruise con- trol*
168
Radar sensor* 172, 181
Camera sensor*, Laser sensor *
181, 184, 187
Auto Brake*, Dis- tance Alert*, Collision warning system *
175, 181 G 02 51 02
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compart- ment heater*
138
ABL system* 79
Sym- bol
Meaning Page
Fuel filler flap, right- hand side
215
Low battery 138
Parking brake 115
Rain sensor* 87
Driver Alert System* 184, 184
Driver Alert System*, Lane Departure Warning *
184, 187
Driver Alert System*, Lane Departure Warning *
187
Driver Alert System*, Time for a break
184
08 Specifications
Symbols in the display
08
304 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Information symbols in the centre
console display
Sym- bol
Meaning Page
Audio files 146
Directory in CD disc 146
Traffic information 148
Phone* 200, 205
Bluetooth TM hands- free *
201, 203
Parking assistance* 189
Information symbols in the roof console
display
Sym- bol
Meaning Page
Seatbelt reminder 17
Airbag, passenger seat, activated
22, 23
Airbag, passenger seat, deactivated
23
08 Specifications
08
305
09 Alphabetical Index
09
306
A
ACC Adaptive cruise control................. 166
Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 79
Active chassis FOUR-C........................ 163
Active Xenon headlamps........................... 79
Adaptation............................................... 104
Adapting driving characteristics.............. 163
Adaptive cruise control............................ 166 fault tracing......................................... 171 radar sensor........................................ 170
Adaptive cruise control fault tracing........ 171
Additional heater (Diesel)......................... 140
Adjusting headlamp pattern...................... 83 halogen headlamp................................ 84
Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 77
Airbag activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 22 driver's and front passenger side......... 20 key switch off........................................ 22
AIRBAG ..................................................... 20
Airbag system ........................................... 19
Air conditioning........................................ 134 general................................................ 129
Air conditioning, AC................................. 134
Air distribution.................................. 131, 136
Air vents................................................... 131
Alarm.......................................................... 56 alarm indicator...................................... 56 alarm signals......................................... 56 arming................................................... 56 checking the alarm............................... 42 deactivating.......................................... 56 deactivating a triggered alarm.............. 56 reduced alarm level.............................. 57 temporary disarming of the alarm........ 57 testing the alarm system...................... 57
Alcolock..................................................... 97
Allergy and asthma inducing sub- stances.................................................... 130
All-wheel drive, AWD............................... 111
All Wheel Drive (AWD).............................. 111
Approach light, duration............................ 83
Audio headphones socket............................ 142 rear control panel................................ 142 settings............................................... 142 surround............................................. 141
Audio system........................................... 141 functions............................................. 142 overview.............................................. 141
Audio volume phone.................................................. 202 phone/media player............................ 202 ring signal, phone............................... 202
Auto climate control settings...................... 133
Automatic car washes............................. 275
Automatic gearbox.................................. 106 manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 107 towing and recovery........................... 229 trailer................................................... 224
Automatic locking...................................... 51
Automatic relocking................................... 51
AUX.......................................................... 141
Auxiliary heater........................................ 140
AWD, All-wheel drive............................... 111
B
Backrest..................................................... 71 front seat, lowering............................... 71
Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 73
09 Alphabetical Index
09
307
Bag holder .............................................. 221
Battery............................................. 264, 300 maintenance....................................... 264 remote control key/PCC....................... 46 start assistance................................... 105 symbols on the battery....................... 264 warning symbols................................. 264
Bioethanol E85........................................ 217
Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 192
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS...... 192
Bluetooth handsfree............................................ 200 mute microphone............................... 202 transfer call to mobile......................... 202
Bonnet, opening...................................... 248
Boot lid locking/unlocking.................................. 52
Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 253
Brake light.................................................. 80
Brakes...................................................... 112 anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 112 brake light............................................. 80 brake system...................................... 112 electric parking brake......................... 114 Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 112 emergency brake lights........................ 80
filling brake fluid.................................. 253 symbols in the combined instrument panel................................................... 113
Built-in phone.......................................... 205
Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 255
C
Calls functions during a call................ 205, 206 incoming..................................... 201, 206 operation..................................... 201, 205 volume in phone................................. 206 waiting................................................ 206
Call waiting.............................................. 206
Camera sensor........................................ 180
Car care................................................... 275
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 277
Cargo area loading................................................ 220 load retaining eyelets.......................... 221 mat...................................................... 199
Car upholstery......................................... 277
Car wash.................................................. 275
Catalytic converter................................... 216 recovery.............................................. 229
Centre console........................................ 122
Chassis settings...................................... 163
Checking and topping up the coolant..... 252
Children..................................................... 31 child safety locks.................................. 36 child seats and side airbags................. 24 location in the car................................. 31 safety.................................................... 31
Child safety locks...................................... 55
Child seat................................................... 31
Child seats................................................. 31 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 36 recommended...................................... 33 upper mounting points for child seats.. 36
Cigarette lighter socket............................ 197
Cleaning automatic car washes......................... 275 car wash............................................. 275 rims..................................................... 276 seatbelts............................................. 277 upholstery........................................... 277
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)........ 130
09 Alphabetical Index
09
308
Climate control........................................ 129 general................................................ 129 sensors............................................... 129
Clock analogue............................................... 68
Clock, setting............................................. 67
CO2 emissions ........................................ 293
Collision..................................................... 30
Collision warning..................................... 177
Collision warning system radar sensor................................ 170, 177
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*......... 177
Colour code, paint................................... 278
Combined instrument panel.................... 126
Comfort inside the passenger compart- ment......................................................... 196
Compass................................................... 94 calibration............................................. 94 setting the zone.................................... 94
Condensation in headlamps.................... 275
Controls centre console.................................... 122
Cooler box............................................... 199
Cooling system........................................ 212
Crash, see Collision................................... 30
Cruise control.......................................... 164
CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)......... 130
D
DAB, menu structure............................... 152
DAB Radio............................................... 151
Deadlocks.................................................. 53 deactivation.......................................... 53 temporary deactivation......................... 54
Defroster.................................................. 134
Diesel....................................................... 217
Diesel particle filter.................................. 218
Dipstick, electronic.................................. 251
Direction indicators.................................... 81
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 108
Display lighting.......................................... 78
Distance Alert.......................................... 174
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II.................... 141
Door mirrors............................................... 91
Driver Alert Control.................................. 183
Driver Alert System.................................. 183
Driving...................................................... 212 cooling system.................................... 212 with the boot lid open......................... 213 with trailer........................................... 223
Driving in water........................................ 212
Driving with a trailer towball load........................................ 284 towing capacity.................................. 284
DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 161
E
ECC, electronic climate control............... 132
Economical driving.................................. 212
ECO pressure.......................................... 240
Electrical socket...................................... 198 cargo area........................................... 221 front seat............................................. 198
Electric parking brake.............................. 114 low battery voltage............................. 114 releasing automatically....................... 115 releasing manually.............................. 115
Emergency calls...................................... 205
Emergency equipment warning triangle.................................. 241
09 Alphabetical Index
09
309
Emergency puncture repair..................... 242
Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 218
Engine overheating......................................... 223 starting................................................ 101
Engine block heater................................. 103 fuel-driven........................................... 137
Engine compartment coolant................................................ 252 oil........................................................ 250 overview.............................................. 249 power steering fluid............................ 253
Engine oil......................................... 249, 289 adverse driving conditions.................. 289 capacities........................................... 289 filter..................................................... 250 oil grade.............................................. 289
Engine specifications............................... 288
Environmental labelling, FSC, owner's manual....................................................... 12
Error messages Driver Alert Control............................. 184 Lane Departure Warning..................... 187 see Messages and symbols............... 172
Error messages in BLIS........................... 193
Error messages in Distance Alert............ 175
Error messages in the Adaptive cruise con- trol............................................................ 172
Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 17
External dimensions................................ 284
F
Fan........................................................... 132
Fault tracing for the camera sensor......... 180
First aid equipment.................................. 241
First aid kit .............................................. 241
Flexifuel.................................................... 103 adaptation........................................... 104
Floor mats................................................ 198
Fluids, capacities..................................... 291
Fluids and oils.......................................... 291
FM, menu structure................................. 150
Fog lamp front...................................................... 80
Fog lamps rear........................................................ 81
Fog lamps, on/off...................................... 80
Foot brake............................................... 112
FOUR-C Active chassis........................ 163
Front seat adjusting front - rear............................. 76 lumbar................................................... 75 massage............................................... 75
FSC, environmental labelling..................... 12
Fuel.......................................................... 216 fuel consumption................................ 293 fuel economy...................................... 240 fuel filter.............................................. 218
Fuse box.................................................. 267 glovebox............................................. 271
Fuses....................................................... 267 box in cargo area................................ 274 changing............................................. 267 general................................................ 267 relay/fuse box in engine compart- ment.................................................... 268
Fuse table fuses in engine compartment............. 269
09 Alphabetical Index
09
310
G
Gearbox................................................... 106 automatic............................................ 106 manual................................................ 106
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 108
Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen- gagement................................................. 108
Geartronic................................................ 107
Glass........................................................ 199 laminated/reinforced............................. 89
Glovebox................................................. 197 locking.................................................. 52
Gross vehicle weight............................... 284
H
Hazard warning flashers............................ 81
Headlamp levelling.................................... 78
Headlamp pattern, adjusting..................... 83
Headlamp pattern adjustment Active Bending Lights .......................... 84
Headlamps............................................... 255
Headphones socket................................. 142
Head restraint centre seat, rear.................................... 74 lowering................................................ 74
Heated washer nozzles.............................. 88
Heating.................................................... 134 rearview and door mirrors.................... 93 rear window.......................................... 93 seats................................................... 133
Heat-reflecting windscreen........................ 89
High engine temperature......................... 223
High-pressure headlamp washing............. 88
HomeLink .............................................. 117
Home safe lighting..................................... 83
Hoot........................................................... 77
Horn........................................................... 77
I
IAQS Interior Air Quality System........... 130
IC Inflatable Curtain................................ 26
IDIS Intelligent Driver Information Sys- tem........................................................... 207
Ignition keys............................................... 69
IMEI number............................................ 208
Immobiliser................................................ 40
Indicator lamps, PCC................................ 42
Inflatable curtain........................................ 26
Information and warning symbols............. 64
Information button, PCC............................ 42
Information displays.................................. 63
Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 78
Instrument overview left-hand drive....................................... 60 right-hand drive.................................... 62
Instruments and controls........................... 60
Interior lighting, see Lighting..................... 82
Interior rearview mirror............................... 93 automatic dimming............................... 93
Intermittent wiping..................................... 87
iPod , connection................................... 144
J
Jack......................................................... 239
09 Alphabetical Index
09
311
K
Kerb weight.............................................. 284
Key............................................................. 40
Key blade................................................... 43
Keyless drive...................................... 48, 101
Keyless start (keyless drive)............... 48, 101
Keylock.................................................... 108
Keypad in the steering wheel................................. 77, 122, 164, 205
Key positions............................................. 69
L
Labels...................................................... 282
Laminated glass......................................... 89
Lamps, see Lighting................................ 255
Lane Departure Control........................... 186
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 277
Lighting.................................................... 255 Active Xenon headlamps...................... 79 approach light, duration....................... 83 automatic lighting, passenger compart- ment...................................................... 82
bulbs, specifications........................... 260 controls................................................. 82 display lighting...................................... 78 front fog lamps..................................... 80 headlamp levelling................................ 78 home safe lighting................................ 83 in passenger compartment................... 82 instrument lighting................................ 78 main/dipped beam............................... 78 position/parking lamps......................... 80 rear fog lamp........................................ 81
Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 255 cargo area........................................... 260 dipped beam halogen......................... 256 direction indicators............................. 257 fog lamp.............................................. 258 lamp housing, rear.............................. 258 lamp housing, rear, direction indica- tors...................................................... 258 main beam, Xenon lamp..................... 257 main beam halogen............................ 256 number plate lighting.......................... 259 parking lamps..................................... 257 side marker lamps.............................. 258 vanity mirror........................................ 260
Light switches............................................ 78
Loading cargo area........................................... 220 general................................................ 220 load retaining eyelets.......................... 221 roof load............................................. 220
Lock confirmation ..................................... 40
Locking/unlocking inside.................................................... 51
Locks automatic locking................................. 51 boot lid.................................................. 52 locking.................................................. 51 unlocking.............................................. 51
Lubricants................................................ 291
Lubricants, capacities.............................. 291
M
Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 78
Maintenance rustproofing........................................ 276
Making calls..................................... 201, 205
Manual gearbox....................................... 106 towing and recovery........................... 229
Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 107
09 Alphabetical Index
09
312
Massage front seat............................................... 75
Max. roof load ......................................... 284
Memory function in seats.......................... 72
Menus and messages.............................. 122
Menu structure DAB.................................................... 152 FM....................................................... 150
Messages and symbols Collision Warning with Auto Brake..... 181 Distance Alert..................................... 175 Driver Alert Control............................. 184 Lane Departure Warning..................... 187
Messages and symbols in the Adaptive cruise control........................................... 172
Messages in BLIS.................................... 193
Messages in the combined instrument panel........................................................ 126
Messages in the information display....... 161
Meters in the combined instrument panel fuel gauge............................................. 64 speedometer......................................... 64 tachometer........................................... 64
Misting..................................................... 134 attending to the windows................... 129
condensation in headlamps............... 275 remove with the air vents................... 136 timer function...................................... 134
Mobile phone connect............................................... 203 handsfree............................................ 200 register phone..................................... 200
O
Oil, see also Engine oil............................. 289
Oil level low.............................................. 250
Overheating............................................. 223
Owner's manual, environmental labelling.. 12
P
PACOS....................................................... 22
PACOS, switch.......................................... 22
Paintwork colour code......................................... 278 damage and touch-up........................ 278
Panel lighting............................................. 78
Panic function............................................ 41
Parking assistance................................... 189 parking assistance sensors................ 191
Parking brake........................................... 114
Parking heater.......................................... 137 battery and fuel................................... 137 parking on a hill.................................. 137 time setting......................................... 139
Passenger compartment......................... 196
Passenger compartment filter................. 130
Passenger compartment heater fuel-driven........................................... 137
PCC Personal Car Communicator functions............................................... 41 range............................................... 42, 43
Petrol grade............................................. 216
Phone built-in, overview................................ 205 connect............................................... 203 handsfree............................................ 200 incoming calls..................................... 201 making calls........................................ 201 messages........................................... 207 on/off.................................................. 205 phone book......................................... 203 phone book, shortcut......................... 203 receiving a call.................................... 202
09 Alphabetical Index
09
313
register phone..................................... 200 ring signal........................................... 206 SIM card............................................. 208
Phone book............................................. 207
Pinch protection, sunroof.......................... 96
Polishing.................................................. 276
Position/parking lamps.............................. 80
Power seat................................................. 72
Powershift gearbox.......................... 109, 229
Power sunroof........................................... 95
Power windows......................................... 89
Privacy locking........................................... 45
Puncture, see Tyres................................. 239
Putting calls on hold................................ 206
R
Radar sensor........................................... 166 limitations........................................... 170
Rain sensor................................................ 87
Rear bulbs location............................................... 259
Rear control panel audio system...................................... 142
Rearview and door mirrors compass............................................... 94 door...................................................... 91 electrically retractable........................... 92 heating.................................................. 93 interior................................................... 93
Rear window, defrosting............................ 93
Recirculation............................................ 134
Recommendations during driving............ 212
Recommended child seats, table.............. 33
Recovery.................................................. 230
Refrigerant............................................... 130
Refuelling................................................. 215 fuel cap............................................... 215 fuel filler flap, electrical opening......... 215 fuel filler flap, manual opening............ 215 refuelling............................................. 215
Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 267
Remote control, HomeLink programmable ................................... 117
Remote control key................................... 40 battery replacement.............................. 46 detachable key blade........................... 43 functions............................................... 41 range..................................................... 42
Remote control key system, type appro- val............................................................ 301
Resetting the door mirrors......................... 92
Resetting the power windows................... 90
Retractable power door mirrors................. 92
Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 106
Rims cleaning.............................................. 276
Roof load, max. weight ........................... 284
Rustproofing............................................ 276
S
Safety mode.............................................. 30
Seat, see Seats.......................................... 71
Seatbelt rear seat................................................ 17 seatbelt tensioner................................. 18
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 17
Seatbelts.................................................... 16
Seats.......................................................... 71 head restraints, rear.............................. 74 heating................................................ 133 lowering the front backrest................... 71
09 Alphabetical Index
09
314
lowering the rear backrest.................... 73 power seats.......................................... 72 ventilated front seats.......................... 132
Service programme................................. 248
Set time interval....................................... 174
Side airbags............................................... 24
Signal input, external............................... 141
SIM card.................................................. 208
SIPS bags.................................................. 24
Ski hatch.................................................. 222
Soot filter................................................. 218
Soot filter full............................................ 218
Spare wheel............................................. 239 temporary spare................................. 239
Spin control............................................. 161
Spin control function............................... 161
Stability and traction control system....... 161
Stability system....................................... 161
Stains....................................................... 277
Start assistance....................................... 105
Steering force, speed related.................. 163
Steering force level, see Steering force... 163
Steering lock............................................ 102
Steering wheel........................................... 77 keypad.................. 77, 122, 141, 164, 205 keypad, adaptive cruise control......... 168 steering wheel adjustment.................... 77
Stone chips and scratches...................... 278
Storage compartment.............................. 199
Storage spaces in the passenger compart- ment......................................................... 196
Sun blind.................................................... 91
Sunroof opening and closing............................. 95 pinch protection.................................... 96 sunscreen............................................. 96 ventilation position................................ 95
Sunscreen, sunroof.................................... 96
Surround.................................................. 141
Symbols................................................... 161 indicator symbols................................. 64 information symbols............................. 64 warning symbols................................... 64
Symbols and messages Collision Warning with Auto Brake..... 181 Distance Alert..................................... 175 Driver Alert Control............................. 184 Lane Departure Warning..................... 187
Symbols and messages in the Adaptive cruise control........................................... 172
T
Temperature actual temperature............................. 129
Temperature control................................ 134
Testing the alarm system........................... 57
Timer........................................................ 134
Tools........................................................ 239
Total airing function........................... 51, 130
Towbar detachable, attachment ..................... 226 detachable, removal .......................... 227
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 224
Towing..................................................... 229 towing eye.......................................... 230
Towing capacity....................................... 284
Towing equipment................................... 224 specifications...................................... 225
Towing eye.............................................. 230
09 Alphabetical Index
09
315
Trailer....................................................... 223 cable................................................... 223 driving with a trailer............................ 223
Transmission............................................ 106
Transponder.............................................. 89
Trip computer.......................................... 159
Trip meter.................................................. 67
Type approval, remote control key sys- tem........................................................... 301
Type designation..................................... 282
Tyres dimensions......................................... 296 direction of rotation............................ 234 driving characteristics......................... 234 maintenance....................................... 234 pressure...................................... 240, 296 puncture repair................................... 242 specifications.............................. 236, 296 speed ratings...................................... 237 tread wear indicators.......................... 235 winter tyres......................................... 236
U
Unlocking from the inside...................................... 51 from the outside................................... 51
USB, connection...................................... 144
V
Vanity mirror...................................... 82, 198
Ventilation................................................ 131
Vibration damper..................................... 224
W
Warning lamp adaptive cruise control....................... 166 collision warning system.................... 177 stability and traction control system. . 161
Warning lamps airbags SRS.......................................... 65 alternator not charging......................... 65 fault in brake system............................ 65 low oil pressure..................................... 65 parking brake applied........................... 65
seatbelt reminder.................................. 65 warning................................................. 65
Warning sound collision warning system.................... 177
Warning symbol, airbag system................ 19
Warning triangle....................................... 241
Washer fluid, filling................................... 263
Washer nozzles, heated............................. 88
Washers washer fluid, filling.............................. 263 windscreen........................................... 88
Water and dirt-repellent coating................ 89
Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 276
Waxing..................................................... 276
Weights kerb weight......................................... 284
Wheels changing............................................. 238 installation........................................... 238 rims..................................................... 235 snow chains........................................ 236 spare wheel........................................ 239
Wheels and tyres..................................... 234
Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 27
09 Alphabetical Index
09
316
WHIPS child seat/booster cushion................... 27 whiplash injury...................................... 27
Windows, rearview and door mirrors......... 89
Windscreen washing.................................. 88
Windscreen wipers.................................... 87 rain sensor............................................ 87
Winter driving........................................... 213
Winter tyres.............................................. 236
Wiper blades............................................ 262 changing............................................. 262 cleaning.............................................. 262 service position................................... 262
Wipers and washing..
Related manuals for Volvo S80 2011 Owners Manual
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the S80 Volvo works, you can view and download the Volvo S80 2011 Owners Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Volvo S80 as well as other Volvo manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Volvo S80. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Volvo S80 2011 Owners Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Volvo S80 2011 Owners Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Volvo S80 2011 Owners Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Volvo S80 2011 Owners Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Volvo S80 2011 Owners Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.